JP2022048431A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase interest of a game.SOLUTION: A performance period of a special development performance is longer than that of a particular development performance. The special development performance includes a first performance in which the visibility of a performance image is reduced, a second performance executed after the first performance in which pre-stage information can be visually displayed, and a third performance executed after the second performance in which post-stage information having a higher degree of emphasis than that of the pre-stage information can be visually displayed. The period from the execution of the particular development performance to the notification to be controlled to be in an advantageous state is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development performance to the notification to be controlled to be in the advantageous state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the conventional gaming machine, a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed in the image display device, and based on the display mode of the meter being level 4, a plurality of super reach Some of the reach effects are performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-221121

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that only one of the reach effects of a plurality of super reach is executed based on the change of the display mode of the meter to level 4, and the game entertainment cannot be improved. There is.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
Moreover,
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and
As the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display in step S172. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect vibrate. Aspects are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means A. Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-38019, a technique of providing a vibrating means to a hitting ball launch handle has been proposed. However, there was room for improvement in improving the interest of the production by vibration.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming when performing an effect by vibration.

The gaming machine of means A is
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and
As the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display in step S172. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect vibrate. Aspects are different (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a big hit in the variable display of 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of a loss with a time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating the effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the production period in each fluctuation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the effect when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the first stage effect and the second stage effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image display device. It is explanatory drawing of the data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a meter effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the meter effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st timing to the 5th timing in each fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reach production E development suggestion effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a branch destination suggestion effect decision process. (A) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the reach effect G development suggestion effect decision process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach effect determination ratio at the time of a big hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach effect determination ratio at the time of off, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between the reach effect C and the reach effect D. (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ at the time of a big hit and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference between the determination ratios of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It is explanatory drawing of the difference of the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variation pattern of reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the chance up effect decision processing. It is explanatory drawing of the viable period of the chance up effect in each reach effect. It is explanatory drawing of the production which can be executed as a chance up production. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the effect pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in each reach effect. be. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the change rate of the display mode of an active display in a modification. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modification. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the chance up effect, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the length of the revival effect in the modification. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process which concerns on a feature part 10SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of a vibration effect and an example of a jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing and the effect period of a vibration effect and a line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the production apparatus about the characteristic part 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the setting example when the operation part effect pattern and the specific interlocking effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the continuous effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the timing which can execute the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part effect. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the effect of making a game effect lamp emit light. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the effect period which can execute a specific interlocking effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the effect execution example when the reach effect is executed. It is a figure which shows the music reproduction execution example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. It should be noted that the fluctuation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as variable display or variable.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of hold storages. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening in which a game ball is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area by a hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout unit (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation for the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls by winning a prize in the big prize opening (attacker). The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the gaming machine frame 3, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player to the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal map game (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per-normal", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the jackpot game state described later (a start winning is generated, but is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" and the jackpot symbol. If a special symbol different from the above (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". The "missing" in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a "missing time reduction" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the big hit game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A big hit type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened from the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probabilistic state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability change control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the “big hit” is likely to occur, which is a more advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the probabilistic change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as when the process was not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time reduction control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time reduction control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in a time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in a probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in a normal state. The high-accuracy state and the low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

The gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probable change state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is an aspect that is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are all stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of "probability change jackpot" which is controlled to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is changed after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a definite decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (holding display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating (turning on) the power supply switch 91, power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be transferred to the power supply board 17. Can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is a progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 has, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball has passed or has passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

A reset signal, a power cutoff signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power cutoff signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage falls below the predetermined value continues until the power failure reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transfers a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including the jackpot type)), and fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing an effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing a program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and is an effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the voice designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. Consists of including the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the gaming control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes a stack pointer setting, a register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), a parallel input / output port, etc.), a setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the design can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is made from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the missing symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stop state different from the missing symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process of step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to enter the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined error processing on the main side, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the jackpot game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the normal figure hold display 25C is turned on to display the number of normal figure hold.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit" are displayed as the display result. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit", etc. It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "off", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7A, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special map has the set value of 2 to 6 in the first special map and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (A).

As shown in FIG. 7B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probable change state, 1020 to 1346 of the above-mentioned hit determination values are assigned to "big hit", and the other numerical ranges are "missing". Assigned. It should be noted that the case where the variable special figure has the set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "missing time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 8, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, it is common among the hit determination values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to the setting. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, a range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, a range of 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 ( When only the numerical value in 1020 to 1346) is assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, it is within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical values are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the setting value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the setting value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the setting value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the setting value 5. , The setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, and the time is shortened. The loss determination value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set in the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the case where the playing state is the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, in the case where the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio that the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio in all the set values, so that the setting value is gambling. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Further, regarding the time-reduced deviation to which a common judgment value number is assigned to each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-reduced deviation reference value, in any setting value, it is variablely displayed. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are made. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 029SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The feature unit 029SG includes the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG.

The gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
The effect period of the second suggestion effect is longer than the effect period of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is the execution of the reach effect A. The part that is set longer than the length L1 of the period),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the second suggestion effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute the development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if the special development effect is not executed, the first suggestion effect is performed. 2 It is possible to surely draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the control of the advantageous state is controlled as a result of the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, the portion for executing the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect) is provided.
The means for executing the development suggestion effect is
As the development suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed both during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, when the reach effect A is being executed in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α, the super reach β, the super reach δ, the super reach ζ, and the super reach η. The part where the meter effect can be executed while the reach effect B is being executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to arouse the expectation that the player's special development effect will be executed by the special development suggestion effect during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and the execution period of the second suggestion effect. can.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects.
When the special suggestion effect is executed without executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the development effect execution means sets the special development effect before the special suggestion effect is executed. It can be executed as a three-development pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed. At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once, and the high expectation reach production development notification production is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed, the player is focused on whether or not the special development effect is executed and the special suggestion effect with high expectation is executed. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
During the period from the execution of the special development effect to the execution of the special suggestion effect and the notification that the special suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the third suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed. It is longer than the period until it is notified that it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the reach effect is from the high expectation reach effect development notification effect start timing. The length L13 of the period until the end timing of I (notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F. The part that is done),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by prolonging the period until the notification when the special development effect with high expectation is executed, the expectation controlled to the advantageous state can be effectively increased.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, the portion for executing the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect) is provided.
The development suggestion effect execution means includes a special development suggestion effect (for example, a meter effect) that suggests the execution of the special development effect by changing the effect mode stepwise, and the effect mode changing stepwise. It is possible to execute a special development suggestion effect (for example, reach performance E output development suggestion effect) that suggests the execution of the special development effect.
The rate at which the effect mode changes to a specific number of stages in the special development suggestion effect is higher than the rate at which the effect mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 11-24 and 11-54). As described above, in the meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included), whereas in the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image is displayed. Part that changes in two stages),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the first suggestion effect in which the special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which the special development suggestion effect is executed, and the special development in the special development suggestion effect. Since it is easier to change to a specific number of stages than a suggestion effect, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not it changes to a specific number of stages, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect.
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ. In the variable display in the variable pattern, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period L6a),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the special development effect is executed, the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect, is executed, and after the execution of the special development effect is suggested, the fourth suggestion effect is executed. Since it is possible to suggest for a longer period of time than it is executed, it is possible to improve the production interest of the special development suggestion production.

The gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect). The E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is recognized that the execution of the special development suggestion effect during the execution of the second suggestion effect informs the player that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above.

The gaming machine according to the ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
An advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a chance-up effect) that suggests that the effect result of the suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the suggestion effect, and constitutes the advantageous result suggestion effect. The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31, and then the variable display shown in FIG. 10). The part that executes the middle production process) is provided.
The number of times the configuration effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is executed is larger than the number of times the configuration effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-34). As described above, during the execution of the reach effect F, a total of three effects are displayed, that is, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are displayed as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. While it is feasible (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, and pattern U), while the reach effect A is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red as an effect that constitutes the chance-up effect. A total of two effects of the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the part where the chance-up effect can be executed by pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the configuration effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is equal to or less than the number of executions of the configuration effect when the second suggestion effect is executed (for example, shown in FIGS. 11-34). As described above, while the reach effect E is being executed, a total of two effects, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, can be executed as the effects constituting the chance-up effect (chance-up effect is changed to pattern S and pattern Q). While the reach effect B is being executed, there are a total of three effects that constitute the chance-up effect: the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200. The part where the effect can be executed (the part where the chance-up effect can be executed by pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the special development effect is executed before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified and the third suggestion effect is further executed, the first suggestion effect is executed. When the third suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the configuration effect is executed increases, so that the player can more appropriately pay attention to the effect result of the third suggestion effect. 2 In the case where the special development effect is executed and the fourth suggestion effect is further executed after being notified that the effect is not controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the effect of the suggestion effect, the composition effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed. By setting the number of times of execution of to be equal to or less than the number of times of execution of the configuration effect when the second suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the effect result of the fourth suggestion effect. You can improve the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect.
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means can execute the advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a chance-up effect) in a plurality of aspects including a common aspect.
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-12, the reach title). The part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display and the movement of the movable body 32 is performed in any of the reach effects A to the reach effect F),.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect while suppressing the increase in the number of modes of the advantageous result suggestion effect. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth or tenth aspect.
When the suggestion effect is executed, the suggestion effect execution means can display an image corresponding to the expectation degree corresponding to the expectation degree of the suggestion effect, and the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed on the expectation degree corresponding image. (For example, as shown in the modification 029SG-5, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, they are displayed together with the reach title image. The part that changes the display mode of the expectation image showing the jackpot expectation (increasing the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the expected degree corresponding image changes with the execution of the advantageous result suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the attention to the expectation degree corresponding image, so that the player can accurately determine the expectation degree of the suggestion effect. Can be recognized by.

The gaming machine according to the 12th aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the 1st to 11th aspects.
A specific image suggestion effect (for example, a modification) that is different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the specific image (for example, active display) displayed during the suggestion effect is controlled to the advantageous state. As shown in FIGS. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1 as a specific image suggestion effect executing means (for example, an active display effect provided in the display area of the image display device 5) capable of executing the active display effect shown in Example 029SG-1. The display area 029SG005F is provided with a portion in which the active display is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes and the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in).
The specific image suggestion effect executing means can execute a common specific image suggestion effect in common in any of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, the active display is a white circle, Blue circle, red circle can be displayed),
The ratio of the common specific image suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is executed after the special development effect is executed. It is lower than the ratio at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as a modified example 029SG-1, variable display as an effect result of the reach effect A. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect F is executed before the result is notified, the active display is displayed during the execution of the reach effect A. The rate at which the aspect changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is P2, and the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect F is a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape. The rate of change to P3 is lower than P3),
The ratio of the common specific image suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is the ratio of the special development effect being executed in the second development pattern. Is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect (eg, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as variant 029SG-1). The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect result of the reach effect B. The display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed and the reach effect E is further executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified. The rate of change from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is higher than P1),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and the third suggestion effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestion effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize this in advance, and in the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect, the common specific image suggestion effect is appropriately executed according to the degree of expectation, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect.
The specific image suggestion effect executing means changes the display mode of the specific image from the first mode (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to a second mode (for example, a second mode) having a higher expectation than the first mode. Can be varied into any of a number of embodiments (red circle), including
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect after the development effect is executed (. For example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect F is a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle. The ratio P3 that changes to the shape is set higher than the ratio P2 that the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect A, and the super reach ζ. In the variable display of the variation pattern of, the ratio P1 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E is active during the execution of the reach effect B. The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the white circle or blue circle changes to the red circle),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and the display mode of the specific image is changed to the second mode before the development effect. It is possible to reduce the risk of deterioration of the game entertainment due to the person's recognition in advance that the degree of expectation is high.

The gaming machine according to the 14th aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the 12th or 13th aspect.
When the special suggestion effect is executed without executing the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the development effect execution means sets the special development effect before the special suggestion effect is executed. It can be executed as a three-development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, high expectations are placed from the timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed. Degree reach production The part where the development notification production is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second aspect before the special suggestion effect in the third development pattern is the display of the specific image after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, as shown in the modified example 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display is before the start of the reach effect I. The rate at which is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape P5, and the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of reach effect I. Ratio to be set higher than P6),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image is changed to the second mode before the special suggestion effect, so that the player can easily recognize that the special suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine according to the 15th aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 12th to 14th aspects.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A hold storage means that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14).
A decidable means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17) capable of determining that the development effect is executed when the variable display is started.
With respect to the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage, the CPU 103 determines that the development effect is executed before the determination means is determined (for example, in the winning random number value determination process of the modified example 029SG-4). When the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, which of the super reach fluctuation patterns of super reach α to super reach λ is executed (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display). The part that determines whether it is) and
Equipped with
In the specific image suggestion effect executing means, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect is executed and the special development effect being executed are executed based on the determination result of the determination means. (For example, in the modified example 029SG-4, a triangle, a quadrangle, a star shape, etc. are provided in addition to the round shape as the display mode of the hold storage table display, and the hold storage display is any of them. Reach production E, reach production F, reach production G, reach production H, or reach production I depending on whether the image is displayed in a shape),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the specific image suggestion effect even before the start of the variable display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state).
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. , Reach effect C), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G), and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects. (Part where the CPU 120 performs the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-9, super reach). In the variable display of the variation pattern of κ, the part where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D), the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed. After being notified that the effect is not controlled to the advantageous state as a result of the effect, a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the variation of the super reach θ. In the variable display of the pattern, the development effect execution means (for example, the effect control) which is the part where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D). (Part where the CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10) and
In the first development pattern, a predetermined effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIGS. 11-9) before the special development effect is executed is shown in FIG. The part that executes the effect processing during the variable display shown) and
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect C).
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the super reach κ. In the variable display of the variation pattern of, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8, super reach). In the variable display with the variation pattern of θ, the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and then the reach effect G is executed. Part),
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-9). In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed and the reach effect H is further executed),
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variable display result is displayed. In the case of a big hit, that is, when the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination ratio of the super reach κ big hit fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is variable. Reach effect G development notification effect is executed during display Super reach θ Higher than the determination rate of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7)),
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect G development notification effect. The part that is set longer than L8),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
The ratio of the special development effect being executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the first suggestion effect and the ratio of the special development effect being executed after the predetermined effect is executed in the second suggestion effect. Different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), when the reach effect C is executed, the rate at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect. Is a part higher than the ratio at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect when the reach effect D is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the production can be diversified by the combination of the type of suggestion production and the type of development production, and the suggestion production and the development production can have a predetermined relationship, so that the suggestion production and the development production can be related. You can improve the production of.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means capable of executing the development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the reach effect H development notification effect is provided. The part where the pre-effect is executed from the timing before, and the part where the pre-effect is executed from the timing before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means can execute the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-51). , The part where the pre-production of the common mode is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the attention to the development production by executing the development pre-production, and to draw the player's attention to whether the special development production or the specific development production is executed as the development production. You can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
A special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of the pattern Z displaying the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) and a specific development suggesting the execution of the specific development effect. A suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of a pattern Y displaying the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestion effect (for example) that suggests execution of both the special development effect and the specific development effect. , The branch destination suggestion effect of the pattern X that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X in the image display device 5 and the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the branch destination effect shown in FIGS. 11-27). A portion for executing the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after determining the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the determination process).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to which of the special development suggestion effect, the specific development suggestion effect, and the common development suggestion effect is executed as the development suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects.
The second development is more than the first difference, which is the difference between the ratio at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern and the ratio at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 (for example). As shown in D), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach. When the variable display result becomes a big hit with respect to the variation pattern of the reach effect G development notification effect and the super reach θ in which the reach effect G is executed after the effect result is notified as the effect C or the reach effect D, the super reach κ While the difference between the ratio at which the reach effect C is executed and the ratio at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern is 60%, the reach effect is produced by the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to guess whether or not it is, it becomes possible to pay attention to which of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect.
The rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or substantially the same (for example, variant 029SG-). As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the portion in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are the same).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is expected that the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed. Because you will be able to do it, you can improve your game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect.
The expectation degree when the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same as or substantially the same as the expectation degree when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree and the execution of the reach effect D when the execution of the reach effect C is determined are determined. The part where the expected degree of big hit is the same),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is similarly in an advantageous state. You will be able to expect more, so you can improve your game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects.
A first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) suggesting that the effect result of the first suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion. Execution of advantageous result suggestion effect that can execute the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10).
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
The ratio at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is the ratio of the development suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The rate at which the effect is executed is different (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion effect at a different rate than in the case of effect D),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect is different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that it is suggested that the development suggestion effect is executed. Since it can be performed suitably, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
A first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) suggesting that the effect result of the first suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the first suggestion effect, and the second suggestion. Execution of advantageous result suggestion effect that can execute the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is advantageous for the player during the execution of the effect. Means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 determines execution of the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31 and then executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10).
At least, the development suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the development suggestion effect (for example, meter effect, reach effect E development suggestion effect, reach effect G development suggestion effect) suggesting the execution of the special development effect The execution of the meter effect is determined in the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26. In the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in −29, after the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed) and
Equipped with
When the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion effect being executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect is the first in the first development pattern. 2 When the suggestion effect is executed, the ratio is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13). Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. , The part where it is possible to determine whether or not the chance-up effect is executed at different rates depending on whether the reach effect C is executed and the reach effect D is determined).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the execution ratios of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the effect result is advantageous, are different between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suggest the production result, and thus it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestion effect is the specific development effect or the special development effect after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect. Is higher than the relation about the effect result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, in FIG. 11-28 (A)). As shown, the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ depending on the variable display result. Whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern are whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and then develops into one of the reach effect G to the reach effect I, and these reach effect G to the reach effect. The part that is determined according to which of I it develops),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development effect and the second special development effect is the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect close to the execution time of the first special development effect or the second special development effect. Since it is largely related to this, the attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect can be increased by executing the first special development effect and the second special development effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the tenth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to the ninth aspects.
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, the development effect executing means executes a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the execution of the specific suggestion effect. It is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the part where the reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect is executed).
The ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs between before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, modified example 029SG-12). As described above, the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is performed in any of the reach effects A to the reach effect F).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect can be suitably executed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to which of the first development pattern and the second development pattern.

The gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to tenth aspects.
As the notification mode of the production results in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7) in which it is simply notified that the advantageous state is not controlled is super reach. In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the portion where the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D and the variable display ends), and after being notified once that the advantageous state is not controlled, the above-mentioned A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, after notifying once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D shown in the modified example 029SG-7, is again performed. It has a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit.
When the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed is the first. When the effect result of 1 suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode, the ratio is the same as the ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example). , As shown in the modified example 029SG-7, the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode. And, when the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode, the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z is the same).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are notified in the second notification mode, so that the player can be given an unexpected feeling, and the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect can be produced. The first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect depends on the case where the result is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode. Since the processing for determining the execution of the above can be standardized, the amount of data required for the processing can be suppressed.

The gaming machine according to the 12th aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 7th to 11th aspects.
As the notification mode of the production results in the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, the first notification mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7) in which it is simply notified that the advantageous state is not controlled is super reach. In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, the portion where the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D and the variable display ends), and after being notified once that the advantageous state is not controlled, the above-mentioned A second notification mode in which it is notified that the control is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, after notifying once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D shown in the modified example 029SG-7, is again performed. It has a second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit.
When the special development effect is executed after the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is described. The ratio at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state is determined by the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect. When notified in the second notification mode, the ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is different (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-8, the reach effect C or After the reach effect D is executed and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed, and the reach effect G is executed. When it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ big hit (PB1-7)), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ big hit. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in is the chance-up effect executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The part that differs from the ratio),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the first advantageous result suggestion depends on whether or not the special development effect is executed before it is notified that the advantageous state is controlled. Since the ratio at which the production or the second advantageous result suggestion production is executed can be different, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to the twelfth aspects.
The advantageous result suggestion effect executing means includes a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, branch destination suggestion effect of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). Is feasible and
The execution ratio of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the branch destination suggestion effects are pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z. The part where the execution rate of the high expectation reach production development notification production differs depending on which one is executed),
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect having the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed. If this is the case, it will be an effect result for notifying that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in the modified example 029SG-9). When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, or when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, the reach effect I When is executed, it is notified that the variable display result will be a big hit),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can be surprised, and the player pays attention to whether or not the special development effect is executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect is executed. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 11-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 029SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data are set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated and the like.

The command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing" or "big hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time reduction control nor the probability change control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time reduction control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. Further, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time reduction no probability change state) in which the time reduction control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the 4th game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening, which notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game.

In the hit start specification command and the hit end specification command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result designation command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change) as a winning determination result. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for the variation pattern determination is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1 (A) are examples, and may not have some of these commands, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in the feature unit 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the normal map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also referred to as game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 is one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating the unit may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit gaming state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has one of "probability variable jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to ". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-3 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 029SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The individual special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table to be played.

In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 029SG, the special figure display result determination table is characterized according to whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in the feature unit 029SG, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probabilistic state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability determined (about 1/300 in this feature unit 029SG) (about 1 in this feature unit 029SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability is high.

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 029SG is based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether or not. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-4 (B). In the feature unit 029SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" to be transferred and a "non-probability variation jackpot" to be executed only for the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state and to transition to the low probability variation high base state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. .. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change to the first state advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. May be called.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A to the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variation jackpot A to the probability variation jackpot C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state is in the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously without intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 029SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when the game is in a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are used depending on whether the variablely displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The assignment of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. In the case of Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in the game state where the game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of the big hit state where the number of prize balls obtained is small is avoided and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is present or not, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination values for the "probability change jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value smaller than that in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is in the big hit type of "probability change big hit B" or "probability change big hit C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-5 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG. In this feature unit 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "big hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “missing”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 029SG is provided with one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in this feature unit 029SG, super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach as super reach fluctuation patterns. Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

The super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α, and the super reach β. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ. ), The variable pattern (PA2-4) that is different from the variable display result of the super reach δ, and the variable display result that is different from the variable display result of the super reach ε. Fluctuation pattern (PA2-6), fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach η. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a big hit, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The deviation pattern (PA2-9), the fluctuation pattern (PA2-10) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-8) in which the variable display result is a big hit as the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-11) that is different from the fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, and a fluctuation pattern (PB1-10) in which the variable display result is a big hit as a fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ. ) Is provided with a variation pattern (PA2-12) that is different from the above.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 029SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature unit 029SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. With some exceptions, the longer the special map fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In particular, the special map fluctuation time of the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is that of the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ε fluctuation pattern is set. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ε fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special map fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, and the special map fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern, and the special figure of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Of these super reach α fluctuation patterns to super reach κ fluctuation patterns, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern are not provided with fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a big hit. That is, regarding these super reach α fluctuation patterns to super reach κ fluctuation patterns, the super reach α fluctuation pattern has the shortest special figure fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern excluding the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation is set low, and the jackpot expectation is set to increase as the special figure fluctuation time becomes longer.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, a super reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a super reach fluctuation pattern having a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach κ fluctuation pattern. The super reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set so that the special figure fluctuation time is longer than the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined by using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random values for determining the variation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the super reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) has a length of execution period as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. Is a variation pattern in which the reach effect A of L1 is executed and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect A. As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the super reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the reach effect B of (L2> L1) is executed and the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the super reach α fluctuation pattern and the super reach β fluctuation pattern are from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of the variable display result). It is also a variation pattern in which a meter effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect can be executed over the timing). As described above, since the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A, the meter effect executable period in the super reach β fluctuation pattern is set. The length L5 is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect executable period in the super reach α fluctuation pattern (L5> L4).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (C), the super reach γ fluctuation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is an effect pattern for notifying the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The execution period of both the reach effect C and the reach effect D is set to the length L3. Further, in the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, the reach effect H is further executed after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Which of the reach effect H development notification effect to notify and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to notify that either the reach effect F or the reach effect I is executed (which notification is executed). It is also a variation pattern that can execute the branch destination suggestion effect that suggests (whether to branch to the effect).

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-7 (D), the super reach δ fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) has a reach effect B having an execution period of L2 as a super reach reach effect during variable display. Is executed to notify that the variable display result is out of order, and then the reach effect E development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the reach effect E can be executed (reach effect E development suggestion effect feasible period length: L6a). This is a fluctuation pattern that does not eventually develop into the reach effect E and notifies the loss. As with the super reach β fluctuation pattern, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation in which the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect (length of the meter effect executable period: L5). It is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (E), the super reach ε fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D (either reach) as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display. It is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect that suggests the development to the reach effect G after notifying that the variable display result is out of order by executing L3) for the length of the effect execution period, and finally the reach. It is a fluctuation pattern that notifies the deviation without developing into the production G. Further, the super reach ε fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. It is possible to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect after executing the reach effect B of the above to notify that the variable display result is out of order, and further notify that the reach effect E develops into the reach effect E development notification effect ( Reach effect E This is a variation pattern in which the reach effect E is executed after the length of the execution period of the development notification effect: L6b) is executed. The super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (the length of the meter effect execution period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter effect enablement period is set to be longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect enablement period. The length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. Further, in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η fluctuation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes the reach effect A as the reach effect of the super reach during the variable display. A high-expectation reach effect that informs the development of a reach effect (reach effect F or reach effect I, which will be described later in the case of this feature unit) with a high expectation of a big hit instead of the reach effect A from the middle of the reach effect A. It is a variation pattern in which the development notification effect is executed over L7 (L7> L6b), which is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect F is further executed. As for the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach effect A switches to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (the reach effect A has a high expectation reach in the middle). Since the effect is switched to the effect development notification effect, the length of the meter effect enablement period is also a fluctuation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. Further, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F (notification timing of the variable display result) is the reach effect in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E is set to L12 (L12> L11), which is longer than L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ fluctuation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. (The length of the execution period of any of the reach effects is also L3), and after notifying that the variable display result is out of order in the reach effects C or the reach effects D, the reach effect G development suggestion effect can be executed. Further, the reach effect G development notification effect for notifying the development to the reach effect G is executed over L8 (L7> L8), which is shorter than the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect. Further, it is a fluctuation pattern that executes the reach effect G. Further, the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is executed, and the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect H development notification is notified that the reach effect H is further developed. It is a fluctuation pattern that executes the effect and executes the reach effect H. Further, the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ fluctuation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) has a reach effect C or a reach effect D as a reach effect of the super reach during variable display. Is executed, and the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed in place of the reach effect C or the reach effect D from the middle of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the length of the execution period is L7. This is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed. Further, the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern capable of executing the branch destination suggestion effect during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Further, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is highly expected in the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F is set to L13 (L13> L12> L11) longer than L12.

The super reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) has a high expectation reach effect development in which the length of the execution period is L7 from the timing before the reach in the fluctuation pattern of other super reach during the variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed. In addition, the super reach λ fluctuation pattern can execute the meter effect from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (high expectation reach effect development notification from the timing before the reach). Since the effect is executed, the length of the meter effect executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'': L4> L4'> L4''), which is shorter than L4'. Further, in the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result) is L13 (L13), which is the same as the super reach κ. > L12> L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), as the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect in the feature unit 029SG, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened. A blackout effect that makes the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see, a pre-stage effect that displays a front line on the image display device 5 after the blackout effect, and a switching effect after the pre-stage effect. After the switching effect, the image display device 5 displays the rear-stage effect, and after the post-stage effect, the movable body 32 is placed on the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5 from the origin position above the image display device 5. A movable body effect that drops (moves) to an effect position that overlaps with a substantially central position is executed.

In the first stage effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-55, the dialogue content spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007. At the same time, it is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the latter stage effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-10 (B) and 11-55, following the first stage effect, the dialogue content spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5. This is an effect of outputting as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the dialogue of the first stage production is "I'm not alone ... I'll show everyone's power!", And the dialogue of the second stage production is "Miracle Attack!".

More specifically, the first stage production is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the lines of "not one person ..." are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and at the same time. In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters of "not one person ..." are displayed. Then, in the second period, the lines of "I will show everyone's power!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and at the same time, the "I will show everyone's power!" 12 in the display area of the image display device 5. The characters are displayed below the characters "I'm not alone ...". Further, the latter stage effect is also composed of a first period and a second period. In the first period, the lines of "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and in the display area of the image display device 5. The four characters of the "miracle" are displayed. Then, in the second period, the lines of "attack!" Are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five characters of "attack!" Are below the characters of "miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

That is, in the first stage effect and the second stage effect in the feature unit 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the first stage effect is larger than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the second stage effect, and the first stage effect is the first. The number of characters displayed in the two periods is larger than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the subsequent production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the display mode of the dialogue in the front stage effect is different from the display mode of the dialogue in the rear stage production, and in particular, the dialogue in the rear stage production is the display of the dialogue in the front stage production. It is displayed in a display mode in which the degree of emphasis is higher than that of the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and the character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 composed of a plurality of characters (for example, "not one person ...") is gradually displayed in the first period. The character image 029SG007, which is displayed in a large and bright manner (fade-in) and then consists of a plurality of characters (for example, "I will show everyone's power!"), Is gradually enlarged and bright in the second period. It is displayed in an aspect (fade-in). In addition, the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone ... I'll show you the power of everyone!") Is displayed in the largest and brightest form, and then gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade out). It is done and eventually disappears. The character image 029SG007 may be moved while fading in or fading out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "la", "ku", "le"). ) Is displayed (frame-in) so as to move while rotating from the right side of the display screen toward the center in order in the first period (frame-in), and a plurality of character images 029SG008 (for example, one character) are displayed. "A", "Ta", "Tsu", "Ku", "!") Are displayed (frame-in) so that they move while rotating from the bottom to the center of the display screen in the second period (dynamic display). Will be done. Further, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") Are the largest and are displayed brightly, they move so as to spread radially toward the surroundings and finally disappear from the display screen. It is displayed in the mode (frame out).

As shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 of the previous stage effect is small, planar (two-dimensional), has a slow movement (change speed of the display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. .. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 of the latter stage effect is larger and three-dimensional (three-dimensional) than the character image 029SG007 of the first stage effect, and the movement (change speed (movement speed) of the display mode by frame-in) is fast and has high brightness. It is displayed (see FIGS. 11-55).

If the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the second stage effect is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect, the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in is performed. The size and brightness of a part of the above may be reversed. Further, although the dialogue content is different between the first stage effect and the second stage effect, at least a part of the content may be common.

In this way, the larger the size of the character image that composes the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis, the more three-dimensional the form is, the higher the emphasis is, and the faster the movement is, the higher the emphasis is. It can be said that the higher the brightness is, the higher the emphasis is. In the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image are illustrated in a form in which the latter stage effect has a higher degree of emphasis than the first stage effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage effect is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image of is higher than that of the character image of the previous stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes those in which the thickness of the characters is higher in the thicker than in the thinner ones, and in the color, the ones with higher saturation and lightness are higher. May be good. Further, not only the display mode of the character image itself but also a special image such as an effect image may be displayed around the character image to increase the degree of emphasis.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 029SG. In this feature unit 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a big hit, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (Variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (Variation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (Variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (Variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1 It is determined from -9 (variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot) and PB1-10 (variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot).

When determining the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, set the determination ratio of PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest, and set PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern). , PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (variation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (variation of super reach η jackpot) Pattern), PB1-7 (Variation pattern of super reach θ jackpot), PB1-8 (Variation pattern of super reach ι jackpot), PB1-9 (Variation pattern of super reach κ jackpot), PB1-10 (Variation pattern of super reach λ jackpot) The determination rate may be increased in the order of (variation pattern of) (determination rate of each super reach variation pattern when the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected: PB1-2 <PB1-3 <PB1-4 <PB1-5 < PB1-6 <PB1-7 <PB1-8 <PB1-9 <PB1-10).

In the present feature unit 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the same big hit variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. A plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables having different determination ratios of any one of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 are provided, and the determination ratios of at least two or more jackpot fluctuation patterns are different. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and variation patterns may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables according to the jackpot type. By doing so, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so that the player can pay attention to which variation pattern variable display results in a jackpot. You can improve your hobby.

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation variation pattern), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved storages of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α loss), PA2. -3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β off), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ off), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ off), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε off) , PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ outlier), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ outlier), PA2-10 (fluctuation of outlier of super reach ι) Pattern), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the time saving state (high base state), select the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D, and use the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach α loss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach β loss), PA2 -4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ outlier), PA2-5 (Variation pattern of Super Reach δ outlier), PA2-6 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ε outlier), PA2-7 (Variation pattern of Super Reach ζ outlier) , PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η outlier), PA2-9 (variation pattern of outlier of super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of outlier of super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation of out of super reach κ) Pattern) and PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ outlier).

That is, when the variable display result is "missing" in the feature unit 029SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved storages of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

When the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination tables A to D, the non-reach deviation pattern (PA1-1 for the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table B) If it is PA1-2, if it is the deviation pattern determination table C, it is PA1-3, if it is the deviation pattern determination table D, it is PA1-4), and PA2-1 (normal reach is lost). (Variation pattern of Super Reach α), PA2-2 (Variation pattern of Super Reach α), PA2-3 (Variation pattern of Super Reach β), PA2-4 (Variation pattern of Super Reach γ), PA2-5 (Super Reach) δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 ( Super reach θ out-of-range fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (super reach ι out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (super reach κ out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-12 (super reach λ out-of-order fluctuation pattern) determined in this order The ratio may be set to be low (determination ratio of each super reach variation pattern when the outlier variation pattern determination table is selected: PA2-12 <PA2-11 <PA2-10 <PA2-9 <PA2-8 <PA2-7. <PA2-6 <PA2-5 <PA2-4 <PA2-3 <PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest for the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the super reach β fluctuation is set. The jackpot expectation of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach β fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach η fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern is the jackpot expectation of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach λ fluctuation pattern is the super reach κ fluctuation pattern. It is set higher than the jackpot expectation of. As for the super reach δ fluctuation pattern and the super reach ε fluctuation pattern, as described above, since only the fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is out of alignment is provided, the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in the feature unit 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Further, a first reserved storage display area 029SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 029SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 029SG005D and the second hold storage display area 029SG005U, the hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. .. In this feature unit 029SG, these hold displays can be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and a big hit in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display depending on which display mode the hold storage display is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect (also referred to as a hold display advance notice effect) that makes the ratio controlled by the game state (big hit expectation degree) different.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 029SG, a meter 029SG005M that can change the display mode in 5 stages (6 stages if the state in which the meter effect is not executed is included) is displayed as the meter effect described above. ..

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 029SG is a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in, for example, FIG. 11-12, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 029SG151A, a second special drawing holding storage unit 029SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 029SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 029SG153, a game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special starting prize has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the data is stored. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 029SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number value MR3 for variable pattern determination extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), it is stored. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 029SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. It is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit based on the result).

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start opening data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 029SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit 029SG151C associates with the hold number in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and are stored as random count values according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 029SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 029SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 029SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 has a plurality of types that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 029SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 029SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 029SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. A storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) is provided. When there is a start winning to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, the variable category designation Four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 029SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is set to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process executed when the process is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A of the feature unit 029SG, the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 11-20) is undecided. Whether or not, that is, when a new start prize is generated, a flag value is set according to the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag and the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D and the second hold storage display area 029SG5U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (blue circle) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold storage display in a special mode (for example, blue circle or red circle) different from the normal display mode. ) Or "2" (red circle) is set, the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 029SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 029SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage count notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that was terminated immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry stored in the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The storage contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”) and the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that has been shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 029SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS102; N). Step 029SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS105; N). Step 029SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS103 and step 029SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved storage count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B.

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the process of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to send the first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 can be used. The setting for sending the second start opening prize designation command is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 029SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. (Step 029SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process of step 029SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect a valid start prize for the game ball at the same time, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 029SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-16) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-17), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination processing of step 029SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this judgment result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the big hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets each judgment as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the big hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the big hit judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display. In that case, the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "missing", is executed (step 029SGS128), and whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, , It is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 029SGS129). When the time reduction flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

Further, when it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that constitutes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and in the case of a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 029SGS133), selects and sets the jackpot variation pattern determination table (step 029SGS135), and steps. Proceed to 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are used. A variation category according to a range of determination values including the random number value MR3 is determined (step 029SGS138). In this feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 029SGS138 is made to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step 029SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 029SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Step 029 Following the processing of SGS142, the second special figure holding storage number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage count value and the total holding storage count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "2" (step 029SGS144), the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 029SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Just do it. As described above, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special figure holding storage number is "0", and the first special figure holding storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the first special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the first special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 029SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted higher one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special map designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special map designated buffer, to "1" (step 029SGS148), the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 11-3 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select a table and set it. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 029SGS150a). In this step 029SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 10000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". If the probability variation flag is off and the probability change state is low, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if not, it is determined to be "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. In the process of step 029SGS150a, the special figure display result uses different determination data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table. It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be, depending on which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 029SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability variation C" corresponding to probability variation jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the end of step 029SGS155, or when it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 029SGS150a; N), whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of () and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 029SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 029SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is an effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been sent to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination in step 029SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the gaming state is probablely changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time reduction control is being performed in the state or the time reduction state (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the out-of-order variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 029SGS168; Y). Step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, the storage of the reserved storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. By reading the value or the like, the reserved storage number of the variable special map is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special map is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 029SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 029SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation or the like is displayed. Based on this, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns can be selected by referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, and loss variation pattern determination tables A to D. (Step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 029SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “missing”.

After the fluctuation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special map games using the second special symbol (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is made.

Following the process of step 029SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially send the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 029SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is played from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern It may be transmitted in the order of a designated command, a game state designation command, a first hold storage number notification command, a second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state, terminates the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 029SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). When the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step 029SGS184) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. , Hit start 1 designated command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designated command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designated command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored on the effect control board 12. Hit start 4 Make settings for transmitting the designated command (non-probability change) (step 029SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 029SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 029SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. (Step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is reached. When is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 029SGS194) in order to end the time saving control, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is supported. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low accuracy low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 029SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) for displaying the big hit end on the image display device 5 on the big hit end display timer. Is set (step 029SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the big hit end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time reduction flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time reduction counter is set to "0". After setting (step 029SGS209), the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing step 029SGS211 and step 029SGS212, the time reduction flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time reduction counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 029SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state specification command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 029SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. Is determined by whether or not there is an entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set (step 029SGS242; N). Y) Further, it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243). When the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), a jackpot not shown is shown based on the variable display result being a jackpot. By referring to the look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A). Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in a blue circle in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D or the second hold storage display area 029SG5U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in a red circle in the first hold storage display area 029SG5D or the second hold storage display area 029SG5U. To.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), for example, the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect may be determined at a rate of 65%.

Further, in step 029SGS243, when the symbol designation command of the entry for which the value of the hold display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is the symbol designation command indicating the loss (step 029SGS243; Y). The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a "non-reach" variation pattern category, and if it is C601H, it is a "super reach" variation pattern category. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 029SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 029SGS247. It's different.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), for example, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "non-reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. , The execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern α is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect display pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "Other", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is performed at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is "super reach", the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the display pattern α is performed at a rate of 25%. The execution of the display pattern β of the look-ahead notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided by such a setting, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect is decided, so that it is the target of the look-ahead notice effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Further, when the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a big hit when the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the display pattern β than when it is executed by the display pattern α. , It is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the hold memory display, which is the target of the look-ahead notice effect, is displayed.

In the feature unit 029SG, if the variable display result is a big hit, the presence or absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern are determined at the same ratio regardless of the big hit type, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is a big hit, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be different depending on the big hit type. By doing so, the player can be controlled to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed and which display pattern the hold memory display is displayed. It will be possible to draw attention.

After the execution of step 029SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect is determined in step 029SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 029SGS249).

After the execution of step 029SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display as a blue circle, "1" is set in the hold display flag of the entry. If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display with a red circle, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252. ..

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 029SGS249 (step 029SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white circle (step 029SGS250). ), Proceed to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold storage newly stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in the display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. To.

11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted higher by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are stored for each buffer number. Shift to a higher position (step 029SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the stopped symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, it is used as a stop symbol. , A plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). If the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach misses (missing symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a meter effect determination process for determining whether or not the meter effect is executed and an effect pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. Judgment (step 029SGS278). Whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern may be determined by whether or not the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern.

If the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283, and if the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y). Further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS280; N), the variable is further changed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282), and when the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS 281; N), The process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the reach effect E development notification effect determination process.

In the process of step 029SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, when the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS 280; Y), branching is performed. The branch destination suggestion effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of execution of the prior suggestion effect and the effect pattern is executed (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variable display variation pattern is any of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and the variable display variation pattern is super reach ε or In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process for determining whether or not the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed is executed (step 029SGS286). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the reach effect of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from the reach effect C and the reach effect D (step 029SGS287) according to the variable display result and the variable pattern, and the determination is made. A process table corresponding to the reach effect and the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the process of step 029SGS287, when the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PB1-4), the reach effect C The execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι (PB1-8), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of the reach effect C is 90. It is determined at a rate of%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. If the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. If the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of the reach effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of the reach effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed according to the fluctuation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. By determining at different ratios, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), the reach effect D is set higher than the reach effect C as the overall jackpot expectation.

Further, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach ι (the variable pattern in which the reach effect H development notification effect and the reach effect H are executed after the execution of the advance effect and the precursor effect). As for, the execution of the reach effect D is always decided. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ (the fluctuation pattern in which the high expectation reach production development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the execution of the pre-effect and the precursor effect), the reach is executed. There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the reach effect D is executed.

That is, in the feature unit 029SG, regarding the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ) in which the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed during the variable display, the present feature is performed after the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed. The rate at which the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed in Part 029 (the rate at which the reach effect I with the highest big hit expectation is executed) is higher when the execution of the reach effect C is decided. Is set higher than when it is decided to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 029SG, even if the reach effect C having a lower jackpot expectation than the reach effect D is executed during the variable display, the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed after the reach effect C. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reach effect C is performed, the player recognizes that the jackpot expectation is low when the reach effect C is executed, and the game interest is reduced during the execution of the reach effect C. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and these from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), a comparison is made between the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-effect, the precursor effect, and the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect are executed instead of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. In the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference of the super reach κ is 40%. The difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the variation pattern is set to 60%. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (E), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is 40. The difference between the determination ratio of the reach effect C and the determination rate of the reach effect D in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ is set to 20%.

Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ depend on whether the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. Whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which the advance effect, the precursor effect, and the high expectation reach effect notification effect are executed from the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, or as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Since it is possible to infer whether the reach effect G is a variable display of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified, the reach effect C and the reach effect D can be estimated. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which one is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a chance-up effect is executed, which suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit (big hit expectation) has increased during the variable display. Chance to determine the effect pattern of the up effect The up effect determination process is executed (step 029SGS289).

The effect control CPU 120 that has executed the chance-up effect determination process then starts a process timer according to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 213SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 029SGS292). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and determines whether or not the value of the process timer has timed out. do. Then, when the process timer is not timer-out, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and when the process timer is timer-out, the process data is switched and the next process is performed. The process timer may be started and the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the feature unit 029SG is executed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination process. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-23, first, in the effect control CPU 120, the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS301). When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated. When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step). 029SGS301; N) determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β. , Super reach δ, Super reach ζ, Super reach η, Super reach λ (step 029SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not meter effect is executed according to the variation pattern. The effect pattern is determined (step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach non-reach) fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%. The execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution of the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , The execution of the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%. do. When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of normal reach, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, and the meter effect pattern B is determined. The execution in the meter effect is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution in the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the meter effect pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. The execution in E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

If the fluctuation pattern is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the meter effect pattern A is determined. The execution in the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, the execution in the meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, and the meter effect pattern is determined. The execution in D is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the meter effect pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the meter effect pattern F is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in the pattern E of the above is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution in the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution in pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the meter effect is determined. The execution in the pattern E of the above is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in FIGS. 11-24 (B) and 11-25, the pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (from the start of the variable display if it is a non-reach variable pattern without shortening). The meter 029SG005M is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step at the first timing during the variable display result notification (the period until the variable display result is notified), and the pattern B is the first timing and the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach variation without shortening). If it is a pattern, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (a total of two steps increases) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the variable display result. , Pattern C is the first and second timings, and the first in the period from the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach (in the case of a normal reach variation pattern, the period from the reach to the notification of the variable display result). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (a total of three steps increase).

Further, in the pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing during the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B (a total increase of four steps). ) It is a production pattern. Further, in the pattern E, the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (high expectation reach production start / stop) after the reach production A is being executed and the fourth timing is executed. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (increases by a total of five steps) at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect. The pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by 5 steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the meter effect is determined after executing the process of 029SGS303 (step 029SGS304). When the execution of the meter effect is not decided (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the meter effect is decided (step 029SGS304; Y), the determined meter effect effect pattern is stored. (Step 029SGS305), the meter effect start waiting timer according to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter effect determination process is terminated (step 029SGS306).

When the execution of the meter effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter effect start wait timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the value of the meter effect start wait timer is the timer. Determine if it is out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the meter effect has timed out, the process table for the meter effect is selected according to the determined effect pattern of the meter effect, and the process timer for the meter effect is started. After that, the value of the meter effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the meter effect process timer has timed out. If the meter effect process timer is not timer-out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter effect process timer, and if the meter effect process timer is timer-out, the process data. To switch and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to execute the meter effect during the variable display.

As described above, in the feature unit 029SG, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases up to 5 stages by executing the meter effect during the variable display, and the high expectation reach by increasing the meter 029SG005M up to 5 stages. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the production development production is executed.

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. In the effect control E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-26, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). .. For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Reach production E The execution of the development suggestion production is decided at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the non-execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is 80%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process of step 029SGS311 determines whether or not the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined (step 029SGS312). When the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS312; N), the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process is completed, and the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS312). Y) sets the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect E development suggestion effect and ends the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS313).

When the execution of the reach effect E development suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach effect E development suggestion effect start waiting timer each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and reaches. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for suggesting the development of the effect E has expired. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect E development suggestion effect has timed out, the process table for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is selected and the process timer for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is started. After that, the value of the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer has timed out. .. If the process timer for the reach effect E development suggestion effect is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach effect E development suggestion effect process timer, and the reach effect E development suggestion effect is performed. When the process timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed is rather than the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach δ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed. Since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate, the reach effect E development is performed after the reach effect B is executed in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern according to the variation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , The execution in the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. Determined at a rate of 0%. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 0%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 0%.

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 15%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 5%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 10%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 10%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern X is 30%. It is determined by the ratio, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Y is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the pattern Z is determined at a ratio of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is the execution of the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D in the image display device 5. It is an effect pattern that displays the branch destination suggestion image X that suggests both execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, and the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is the reach effect C or the reach effect D in the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying the branch destination suggestion image Y suggesting the execution of the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the above, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is the reach effect C or the reach effect on the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying a branch destination suggestion image Z suggesting execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect during the execution period of D.

In the feature unit 029SG, among the patterns X to Z, the pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher ratio than the pattern X and the pattern Y when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. That is, the pattern Z is a production pattern having a higher expectation of execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect than the pattern X and the pattern Y (high expectation level of execution expectation of the reach effect development notification effect: pattern Z> pattern Y). , Pattern Z> Pattern X). Further, the pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than the pattern X and the pattern X when the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, that is, the pattern Y has a reach effect H higher than the pattern X and the pattern Z. This is an effect pattern having a high degree of expectation for execution of the development notification effect (reach effect H, degree of expectation for execution of the development notification effect: pattern Y> pattern Z, pattern Y> pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (A), the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result because the determination ratio differs depending on the variation pattern of the variable display. The proportions are not different. That is, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern develop into one of reach effect G to reach effect I after the reach effect C and reach effect D are executed, and whether or not these reach effect G to reach are performed. Although it is determined according to which of the effects I develops, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the variable display are determined. The determination ratio may be different depending on both the variation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may be different depending only on the variable display result.

Returning to FIGS. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined by the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). When the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS232; Y), the determined branch is executed. The effect pattern of the preceding suggestion effect is stored (step 029SGS323), the branch destination suggestion effect start waiting timer is set, and the branch destination suggestion effect determination process ends (step 029SGS324).

When the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer every time the variable display effect process is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestion effect. Determines whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion effect times out, the process table for the branch destination suggestion effect is selected according to the determined effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect, and the process timer for the branch destination suggestion effect is started. Let me. After that, the value of the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion effect process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion effect process timer, and the branch destination suggestion effect process timer is timed out. If so, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the branch destination suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in the feature unit 029SG, any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It is possible to draw the player's attention to switching to the pre-production without being notified of the variable display result as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Further, the advance effect is performed according to which of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Since the ratio of the reach effect H development notification effect being executed after the precursor effect and the ratio of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect being executed are different, the branch destination suggestion image X and the branch destination are displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the suggestion image Y and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed, and the game interest can be improved.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. In the effect control G development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the reach effect G development suggestion effect is executed according to the variation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is 50%. The execution of the reach production G development suggestion production is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is 80%. Determined by the ratio of.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process of step 029SGS331 determines whether or not the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined (step 029SGS332). When the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is not decided (step 029SGS332; N), the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process is completed and the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is decided (step 029SGS332). Y) sets the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect, and ends the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS333).

When the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect start waiting timer each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and reaches. It is determined whether or not the value of the timer for suggesting the production G exhibition has expired. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect has timed out, the process table for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is selected and the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is started. After that, the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer has timed out. .. If the process timer for the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is not timered out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect process timer, and the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect is performed. When the process timer is out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, it is possible to execute the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect G exhibition notification effect is not executed. Since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed at a rate, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ fluctuation patterns, the reach effect G develops after the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern, the chance-up effect determination process is terminated. Further, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ (step 029SGS341).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach λ (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is not the variation pattern of the super reach λ (step). 029SGS341; N) further determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS 342).

When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS342; N), the variable is further changed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343). When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect A according to the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of the effects in the reach effect A to the reach effect I in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-32 (A) to 11-32 (E). As shown in FIGS. 11-32 (A) to 11-32 (I), each of the reach effect A to the reach effect I includes a reach title display period for displaying the title of each reach effect on the image display device 5. After that, the image display device 5 is composed of a battle effect execution period for displaying the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character.

During the reach title display period of each of the reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as a part of the chance-up effect (see FIGS. 11-33 (A)).

Further, regarding the battle effect execution period of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the movable body movable period in which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle effect execution period and the cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5. There is a cut-in image displayable period, and as part of the chance-up effect, the movement of the movable body 32 during the movable body movable period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period can be executed. (See FIG. 11-33 (A)).

Regarding the battle effect execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, a branch destination suggestion effect executeable period is provided after the movable body movable period and the cut-in image displayable period.

Further, regarding the battle execution period of the reach effect E and the reach effect F, a movable body movable period is provided in the first half of the battle effect execution period, and the latter half of the battle effect execution period (end of the battle effect). In the vicinity of the timing), an operation of urging the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result according to the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in the image display device 5. Operation to display the promotion image A promotion image display period is provided. The operation promotion image display period is usually a period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature unit 029SG, during the battle execution period between the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the movement of the movable body during the movable body movable period and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation promotion image display period as part of the chance-up effect. Can be executed (see FIG. 11-33 (B)).

The reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I are not provided with a movable body movable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period. That is, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I are reach effects in which the chance-up effect is not executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 of FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when the variable display result is out of order, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 60%. Determined, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern R is 0. Determined at a rate of%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect A execution is determined (step 029SGS345). If it is not decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect A (step 029SGS345; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS347, and if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect A (step 029SGS345; Y). Stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach η (step 029SGS347). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and when the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach η (step). 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is being executed and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern S is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern T is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern U is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in T is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F execution is determined (step 029SGS349). When the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is not decided (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination process is finished and the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect F is decided. (Step 029SGS349; Y) stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect F according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect determination process (step 029SGS350).

Further, when the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ in step 029SGS343 (step 029SGS343; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a reach effect according to the variable display result. B Whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution and the effect pattern are determined (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern P is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Q of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect B execution is determined (step 029SGS352). If it is not decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS354, and if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect during the reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y). Stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect B according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ. In a certain case (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E execution and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (D), when the variable display result is out of alignment, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 60%, and the chance-up effect pattern S is used. The execution is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern T is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern U is determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern S of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in T is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is being executed is determined (step 029SGS356). When the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is not decided (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination process is finished and the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect E is decided. (Step 029SGS356; Y) stores the determined effect pattern, sets the chance-up effect start timer for reach effect E according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect determination process (step 029SGS357).

Further, in the process of step 029SGS342, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029 SGS342; Y), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ and super reach ε (step 029SGS358).

When the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is changed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach ε (step 029SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is being executed and the chance up effect is executed according to the variable display result. The effect pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A), when the reach effect to be executed is the reach effect C, if the variable display result is out of order, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is 60%. The execution in the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution in the chance-up effect pattern R is determined in. Determined at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (C), when the reach effect to be executed is the reach effect D, if the variable display result is out of order, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Q of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is 10%. Determined by the ratio of. If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%, the execution in the pattern P of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined. The execution in Q is decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution in the pattern R of the chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 40%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D is determined (step 029SGS360). If the execution of the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D has not been decided (step 029SGS360; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated and the chance-up effect during the reach effect C or the reach effect D is being executed. When it is decided to execute (step 029SGS360; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored, and the chance up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D is set according to the fluctuation pattern to determine the chance up effect. Is finished (step 029SGS361).

When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and the chance-up effect start waiting timer is set. Determine if the value has timered out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the chance-up effect has timed out, the process table for the chance-up effect is selected and the process timer for the chance-up effect is started. After that, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by -1 each time the variable display effect process is executed, and it is determined whether or not the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer is not timer-out, control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer is timer-out. , Switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature unit 029SG, the jackpot expectation differs depending on whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so whether the chance-up effect is executed or not. Whether or not it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, in reach productions with relatively low expectation of big hits such as reach production A to reach production D, chance-up production is executed up to three times, so that chance-up production is performed during execution of reach production A to reach production D. It is possible to suggest to the player that the variable display result becomes a big hit effectively according to the number of times of execution.

On the other hand, in reach productions with high expectation of big hits such as reach production G to reach production I, the chance-up production that can be executed during the reach production is only once, so the chance-up production is performed multiple times. It is prevented that the performance of the reach production, which has a high expectation of a big hit, is lowered by the execution.

As shown in FIGS. 11-34 (E), among the effect patterns of the chance-up effect in the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the pattern P executes the red display of the reach title, but is the operation of the movable body 32. The cut-in image display is an effect pattern that is not executed, the pattern Q is an effect pattern that executes the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 but does not display the cut-in image, and the pattern R is the effect pattern of the reach title. It is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (F), among the effect patterns of the reach effect E and the chance-up effect in the reach effect F, the pattern S executes the red display of the reach title, but is the operation of the movable body 32. The display of the image of the stick controller 31A is an effect pattern that is not executed, the pattern Q is an effect pattern that executes the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32, but does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, and the pattern R is an effect pattern. , The red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A are all the effect patterns.

As described above, as the chance-up effect of the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) to 11-34 (D), the chance-up effect as a whole in the reach effect A to the reach effect D is a chance increase. The jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the effect is non-execution, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is non-execution. There is. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set higher than in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern P. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern R, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than that in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern Q (the big hit of the chance-up effect in the reach effect A to the reach effect D). Expectation: Pattern R> Pattern Q> Pattern P> Non-execution).

Further, as for the chance-up effect as a whole in the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance-up effect is not executed, and when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S, it is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set higher than in the case where the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern S. When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern T (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F). Expectation: Pattern U> Pattern T> Pattern S> Non-execution).

Here, comparing the case where the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the case where the reach effect E or the reach effect F is executed, the pattern P and the pattern Q are common in the reach effect A to the reach effect D. While it is set as an effect pattern that can be executed in, the pattern R can be executed only when the reach effect B or the reach effect D is executed. That is, while the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be executed in any of the reach effect A to the reach effect D, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed only in the reach effect B and the reach effect D. It is a production that can be performed.

Further, comparing the case where the reach effect E is executed and the case where the reach effect F is executed, in the reach effect E and the reach effect F, the pattern S and the pattern T are set as an effect pattern that can be executed in common. On the other hand, the pattern U can be executed only when the reach effect F is executed. That is, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed by either the reach effect E or the reach effect F, while the display of the stick controller 31A image as the operation promotion image is the reach effect F. It is a production that can only be performed in.

Next, the effect mode of the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 029SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, a case where the reach effect A is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. The meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as a state in which the number has not increased by one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (when the execution in the pattern D or the pattern E is determined in the feature unit 029SG). (Disclosure), the meter 029SG005M is incremented by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when the reach effect A is started, first, the title image of the reach effect A and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect A are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG251 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG161A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect A, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG161B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect A is completed, the battle effect by the ally character A and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-35 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-36 (H), the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step at the fourth timing even during the battle production.

Further, during the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32. The operation toward the production position is executed. The operation of the movable body 32 as a chance-up effect is a movement from the origin position to the effect position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the effect position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K). Is displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of the super reach α, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), the effect of the battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the end of the battle effect (reach effect A), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of order.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A wins over the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect A) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image displayable period. The meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step (increased to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 stages (full tank) and that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Will be done.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (R), the battle effect is interrupted in the middle, and instead of the battle effect, a high expectation reach effect development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach effect development notification effect. The display of 029SG180 is executed. Then, the reach effect F is started. The details of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect will be described later in FIGS. 11-55.

As shown in FIGS. 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when the reach effect F is started, first, the title image of the reach effect F and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect A are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG256 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG166A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F, while any one of the pattern S, the pattern T, and the pattern U is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG166B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect F is completed, the battle effect by the ally character B and the enemy character B is started as shown in FIGS. 11-37 (U). During the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, it is movable as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (V) and 11-36 (W). The operation (movement) from the origin position of the body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), the player is referred to the player in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not determined by the effect pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, while the effect pattern of the pattern U is used to produce the chance-up effect. When the execution is decided, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the battle effect is produced. The variable display result is notified as the effect result.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) out of the super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (a) and 11-39 (b), the battle As a result of the effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character B to the enemy character B, and after the end of the battle effect (reach effect F), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off. To.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach η jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (c) and 11-39 (d), the battle effect is displayed. As a result of the effect, when the ally character B wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect F) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Next, a case where the reach effect B is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. The meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as a state in which the number has not increased by one step. As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (A) to 11-40 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (when the execution in the pattern D or the pattern E is determined in the feature unit 029SG). (Disclosure), the meter 029SG005M is incremented by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, which is the timing before the reach, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40 (E) and 11-40 (F), when the reach effect B is started, first, the title image of the reach effect B and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect B are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG252 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG162A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect B, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG162B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect B is completed, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G), the battle effect by the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As shown in FIG. 11-41 (H), the meter 029SG005M is further increased by one step at the fourth timing even during the battle production.

Further, during the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32. The operation (movement) to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K). Is displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the effect of the battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the end of the battle effect (reach effect B), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of order.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character B wins over the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (P) and 11-42 (Q), after the end of the cut-in image displayable period When the ally character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect B) is completed, the swing display is performed in a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern. At this time, when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (R), as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (S), the decorative symbol swings after the reach effect E development suggestion effect enableable period. It stops and is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (T), after the reach effect E development suggestion effect enableable period, the reach effect E development notification As the effect, the reach effect E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, the reach production E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach effect E is started, first, the title image of the reach effect E and the jackpot expectation of the reach effect E are expected on the image display device 5. The expected degree image 029SG255 showing the degree is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG165A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect E, while any one of the pattern S, the pattern T, and the pattern U is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG165B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect E is completed, the battle effect by the ally character A and the enemy character B is started as shown in FIGS. 11-42 (W). During the battle effect, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern T or the pattern U, it is movable as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (X) and 11-43 (Y). The operation (movement) from the origin position of the body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle effect progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (Z), 11-43 (a), and 11-43 (b), the player is referred to the player in the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image prompting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not determined by the effect pattern of the pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation promotion image, while the effect pattern of the pattern U is used to produce the chance-up effect. When the execution is decided, the image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period of these operation means ends, the battle effect is produced. The variable display result is notified as the effect result.

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) out of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (c) and 11-44 (d), the battle As a result of the effect, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character A to the enemy character B, and after the end of the battle effect (reach effect E), the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the omission. To.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach ζ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e) and 11-44 (f), the battle effect is displayed. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect E) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Here, the production mode of the reach effect E development suggestion effect from FIGS. 11-42 (Q) to 11-42 (T) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45 (A) to 11-45 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are oscillated in a combination indicating the detachment. In this state, as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the first stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player such as lower brightness and less display color than other images displayed in the display area such as a decorative pattern. It may be an image.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is completed, the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is once shown in FIGS. 11-45 (C) to 11-45 (D). After finishing the display of, the second stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second-stage reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first-stage reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170. Any image may be used as long as it is more visible to the player than the image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (E), the reach effect E development notification image in the image display device 5 is used as the reach effect E development notification effect. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (F), the reach effect E development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect E development notification effect. Image 029SG181 is displayed and reach effect E is executed.

Next, a case where the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed as the reach effect of the super reach will be described. When the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed as the reach effect of the super reach, the meter effect is not executed, so that the description of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach is omitted.

When the reach effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (A) to 11-46 (C), when the reach effect C is started, the reach effect C is first displayed on the image display device 5. The title image of the above and the expectation degree image 029SG253 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect C are displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG163A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect C, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG163B whose title is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect C is completed, the battle effect by the ally character C and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (C).

On the other hand, when the reach effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (D) to 11-46 (F), when the reach effect D is started, the image display device 5 first performs the same. The title image of the reach effect D and the expectation degree image 029SG254 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect D are displayed. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up effect is not decided, the title image 029SG164A whose title character is black is displayed as the title image of the reach effect D, while any one of the pattern P, the pattern Q, and the pattern R is displayed. When the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of, the title image 029SG164B whose title character is red is displayed as the title image of the reach effect D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect D is completed, the battle effect by the ally character D and the enemy character A is started as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (F).

Further, during the battle production of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern Q or the pattern R, FIGS. 11-47 (G) and 11- As shown in 47 (H), the operation (movement) from the origin position of the movable body 32 to the intermediate position is executed. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Further, when the execution of the chance-up effect is determined by the effect pattern of the pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (I) and 11-47 (J). Is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (K) to 11-47- (M), when the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, the cut during the battle effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. After the in-image displayable period, the reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) is executed on the image display device 5 as the branch destination suggestion effect, and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is executed. Branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X), branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image Y) suggesting that the development notification effect (reach effect H) is executed. 029SG005Y), or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is executed is displayed.

After the branch destination suggestion effect executable period, if the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, FIGS. 11-48 (N) to 11-48 (P). ), When the reach effect C is executed, it is notified that the variable display is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character C by the enemy character A as a result of the effect of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed. If so, it is notified that the variable display is out of order due to the defeat of the ally character D by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot, the reach effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S). When C is executed, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit when the ally character C wins the enemy character A as the effect result of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed, the effect result of the battle effect. As a result, when the ally character D defeats the enemy character A, it is notified that the variable display is a big hit. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment.

When the variable display is a variable display of super reach ε or super reach θ, the end of the branch destination suggestion effect execution period is as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (T) to 11-49 (V). Later, when the ally character C or the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order.

Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) is completed, the swing display is performed in a combination indicating the deviation of the decorative pattern. At this time, if it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (W), as the reach effect G development suggestion effect, a decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that the display positions overlap.

When the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (X), the decorative pattern swings after the reach effect G development suggestion effect enableable period. It stops and is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach effect G development suggestion effect enablement period, the reach effect G development notification As the effect, the reach effect G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, the reach production G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (Z), when the reach effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and the expectation image 029SG257 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach effect G are first displayed on the image display device 5. Is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G is completed, the battle effect by the ally character C and the enemy character B is started as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (a) and 11-50 (b). .. When the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-9) out of the super reach θ, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (c) and 11-50 (d), a battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the off.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-50 (e) and 11-50 (f), the battle effect is exhibited. As a result of the effect, when the ally character C wins over the enemy character B, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Here, the production mode of the reach effect G development suggestion effect from FIGS. 11-49 (V) to 11-49 (Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (A) to 11-54 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are oscillated in a combination indicating the detachment. In this state, as the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the first stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device 5. The first-stage reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 has lower brightness and less display color than other images displayed in a display area such as a decorative pattern, and has low visibility from the player. It may be an image.

Then, after the display period of the first stage of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (C) to 11-54 (D), the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is once used. After finishing the display of, the second stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second-stage reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is higher in brightness than the first-stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, and has more display colors. Any image may be used as long as it is more visible to the player than the image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45 (E), the reach effect G development notification image in the image display device 5 is used as the reach effect G development notification effect. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of alignment. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (F), the reach effect G development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect G development notification effect. Image 029SG182 is displayed and reach effect G is executed.

When the variable display is a variable display with a fluctuation pattern of super reach ι or a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, the reach effect is as shown in FIGS. 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h). The shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect after the branch destination suggestion effect executable period during the execution of C or the reach effect D (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area). The shutter image 029SG006 is moved and displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the pre-effect is completed based on the elapse of the predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 is retracted from the central portion of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect. In response to the withdrawal of the shutter image 029SG006, the image of the character C can be visually recognized by the player in the display area of the image display device 5.

When the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (i), the reach effect H development notification is performed on the image display device 5 as the reach effect H development notification effect. After the image 029SG183 is displayed, the reach effect H is executed. Further, when the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, as shown in FIG. 11-51 (j), the image display device 5 has a high expectation as a high expectation reach effect development notification effect. After the reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the reach effect I is executed. The details of the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect will be described later in FIGS. 11-55.

When the variable display of the variable display is the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (k), when the reach effect H is started, the image display device 5 first performs the variable display. The title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H and the expectation degree image 029SG258 showing the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect H are displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H is completed, the battle effect by the ally character D and the enemy character C is started as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (l) and 11-52 (m). .. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-10) out of the super reach ι, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (n) and 11-52 (o), the effect of the battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the end of the battle effect (reach effect H), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that they are out of order.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-8) of the super reach ι jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-52 (p) and 11-52 (q), the battle effect is produced. As a result of the effect, when the ally character D wins over the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the big hit.

Further, when the variable display of the variable display is the variable display of the variable display of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s), high expectation reach effect development When the reach effect I is started, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach effect I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays both the images of the characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I and the expectation degree image 029SG259, so that the reach effect I is the other super reach. Produce a special feeling by having a higher expectation of big hits than reach production.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of the reach effect I is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (t) and 11-53 (u), a battle effect by the ally character A to the ally character D and the enemy character C is performed. Is started. When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern (PA2-11) out of the super reach κ, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (v) and 11-53 (w), the effect of the battle effect is produced. As a result, when the ally character A to the ally character D are defeated by the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the omission. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) of the super reach κ jackpot, as shown in FIGS. 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the battle effect is displayed. As a result of the effect, when the ally character A to the ally character D win the enemy character C, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and after the battle effect (reach effect H) is completed, the decorative pattern stops at the combination indicating the big hit. Is displayed.

Here, the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect from FIGS. 11-37 (R) to 11-37 (T) and 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s) will be described in more detail. ..

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, the reach effect F or the reach effect is produced in the display area of the image display device 5. The high expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 that notifies that I is executed is displayed. Further, after the high expectation reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. Is executed.

In the blackout effect, the darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, which makes it difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image, etc.), and the display screen itself. In addition to lowering the brightness of the image, the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lower than before the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect. Further, the amount of directing light of various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided in the game area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the gaming machine frame 3 is set to the amount of the directing light before the execution of the high expectation reach directing development notification effect. By lowering the amount, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize other effect images (variable display image of decorative pattern, character image, etc.).

Then, after the blackout effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (C), an image of the character C is displayed as a pre-stage effect. Further, in the first stage effect, the dialogue content spoken by the character C is displayed as a character image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55 (D) and 11-55 (E), the switching effect is executed after the end of the first stage effect, and the second stage effect is executed after the end of the changeover effect. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. The feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images is displayed as a switching effect. May be displayable. When any one of the plurality of images can be displayed as the switching effect in this way, the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which image is displayed.

In the subsequent effect, as described above, the dialogue spoken by the character is displayed as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and the dialogue is output as voice information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has a smaller number of characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed at the time of the previous stage production, while the size per character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see FIG. 11-10). ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-55 (F), after the end of the subsequent stage effect, the movable body effect is executed. In the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is the upper position of the image display device 5, to the effect position overlapping with the substantially center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the effect position moves to the origin position by driving a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

Then, after the movable body effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (G), the reach effect according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach η, the reach effect). F. If the variable display is a variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect I) is executed.

Next, the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ will be described. As shown in FIGS. 11-56 (A) to 11-56 (D), in the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, first, when the variable display is started, at the second timing before the reach. The meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once and becomes full. Next, in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5, the telop image 029SG005T that informs that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 stages (is full) and that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed is displayed. Is displayed.

Then, the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed without becoming a reach or executing any of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. It should be noted that the effect mode of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is the same as the effect mode described above in FIGS. 11-55. After the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 11-53, the reach effect I is executed, and finally it is notified that the variable display result is off or a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is the reach effect E development notification. The length of the effect execution period is set longer than L6b, and the reach effect E is executed after the reach effect E development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect E. For the length L11 until the notification is made, the reach effect F is executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect F. The length of the period up to L12 and the period from the start of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the execution of the reach effect I until the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect I. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, when the reach effect E is executed after the reach effect E development suggestion effect is executed, the period until it is notified that the variable display result becomes a big hit. However, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the excessive prolongation of the game. Further, in the case where the reach effect I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, the player is preferably focused on the reach effect I until the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, so that it is longer than the reach effect A. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the reach production B over a period of time, and it is possible to improve the game interest. Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, the reach effect B is different from the reach effect A in that the development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result. Therefore, even if the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed, the player is surely paid attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect B. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when the meter effect is executed as an effect suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect during the execution of the reach effect A and the reach effect B. Therefore, it is possible to arouse the player's expectation that the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed by the execution of the meter effect.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect is not limited to this. Alternatively or in addition, the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

Further, in the present feature unit 029SG, an embodiment in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C and the reach effect are not limited to this. Even when D is executed, the meter effect may be executed. Especially in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the advance effect and the precursor effect are executed from the middle of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. , A case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode for notifying the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect) triggered by the advance effect or the precursor effect. By doing so, whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the pre-effect or precursor effect by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A. Since the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, even if the reach effect A is not executed, the player is asked to perform the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I. Since it can be noticed, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when the reach effect B is executed, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I may be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention may be provided in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed after the reach effect B is executed. By doing so, even when the reach effect B is executed, the player can pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed. You can improve your interest.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the meter 029SG005M is increased by one step from the first timing to the fifth timing as a meter effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M is not limited to this. A case may be provided in which the number is increased by two or more steps at any timing. Further, when the timing for increasing the meter 029SG005M by two or more stages is provided in any of the first timing to the fifth timing in this way, the meter 029SG005M is set at a timing before the reach effect A and the reach effect B are started. The rate of development to reach effect I may differ depending on whether the meter is increased to the fifth stage or the meter 029SG005M is increased to the fifth stage at the timing after the reach effect A or the reach effect B is started. Further, although the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the fifth stage as a meter effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect is the meter 029SG005M. The display mode may be changed in 4 steps or less or 6 steps or more.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the reach effect I is executed after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is started, and the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect I. The length of the period until the notification is L13 is from the start of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect until the reach effect F is executed and the variable display result is notified as a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect F. Since the length of the period is set longer than L12, it is controlled to the big hit game state by lengthening the period until the effect result is notified when the reach effect I with a higher expectation of big hit is executed. It is possible to effectively raise the expectation that is given.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-23 to 11-25, the meter effect suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the feature unit 029SG is maximum from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step in 5 stages (6 stages if the meter effect non-execution state is included). On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-45, in the reach effect E development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the reach effect E in the feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. It is a production that will be done. That is, in the present feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 stages as the meter effect, but the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is 2 stages as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. Can only change up to. For this reason, in the meter effect, the image to be produced (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change up to the 5th stage than the reach effect E development suggestion effect, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this feature unit 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the 5th stage as the meter effect, while the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is changed to the 2nd stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changed up to the fifth stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect. In this way, when the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the fifth stage as the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is up to the fifth stage. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ and the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect enablement period can execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect. Since the length of the period is set longer than L6a, the reach effect E has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect A after the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it can be suggested for a longer period of time than the reach effect E being executed after the execution of the development notification effect is suggested, the game entertainment can be improved.

The feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period L6a, but the present invention is limited to this. The length L5 of the meter effect feasible period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect feasible period.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when the execution of the meter effect is determined, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when the execution of the meter effect is determined. Further, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the increase timing of the first stage.

Further, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B, the reach effect E develops during the execution of the reach effect B. By executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by recognizing that the variable display result is not notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect B.

In the feature unit 029SG, as a pattern that develops from the reach effect B to the reach effect E, the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B. Although only the pattern to be performed (see FIG. 1-8 (F)) is disclosed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern that develops from the reach effect B to the reach effect E is the reach effect B. There may be a case where the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of. In this way, when the case where the reach effect E development notification effect and the reach effect E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B is provided, the reach effect B is being executed. Reach production E The development suggestion production may be feasible.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 to 11-34, the chance-up effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect A to the reach effect F, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. Expectations for big hits differ depending on the crab.

In particular, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η that executes the reach effect F after the reach effect A, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are performed twice in total during the execution of the reach effect A. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect, during the execution of the reach effect F, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image are performed. It is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect over a total of three times of image display. For this reason, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the number of executions of the effects constituting the chance-up effect increases when the reach effect F is executed rather than when the reach effect A is executed. It is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the effect result of the effect F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the operation and cut of the movable body 32 are performed during the execution of the reach effect B. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect three times in total with the display of the in-image 029SG200, during the execution of the reach effect E, the reach title is displayed in red and movable as the chance-up effect. It is possible to execute an effect that constitutes a chance-up effect twice in total, including the movement of the body 32. For this reason, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the reach effect is produced because the number of times the effect constituting the chance-up effect is executed is smaller during the reach effect E than during the reach effect B. Since it is possible to prevent the player from paying excessive attention to the production result of E, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the feature unit 029SG, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the movable body are displayed during the execution of the reach effect B. While it is possible to execute the effect that constitutes the chance-up effect three times in total, the operation of 32 and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, while the reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is used as the chance-up effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the effect B, the same number of effects that make up the chance-up effect can be executed during the execution of the reach effect E as well as during the execution of the reach effect E. May be.

In the feature unit 029SG, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, light emission in a specific pattern of the game effect lamp 9, output of specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, light emission of the light guide plate, and an image display device 5. The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) in the above, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, and the like may be included in the effect constituting the chance-up effect.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as the effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image, etc. All of them illustrate the production (active production) that is executed regardless of the operation of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player constitutes the chance-up production. The effect (active) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the emission color of the game effect lamp 9 (so-called back button) by operating an operating means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Direction) may be included.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-30, the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ is executed. It is possible to determine the reach effect of the super reach to be performed from the reach effect C and the reach effect D having a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect C. Then, when the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed and the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the reach effect is performed. When I is executed and the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of reach effect C or reach effect D, the reach with a lower expectation of big hit than reach effect I. Direction G is executed.

Further, when the pre-effect and the precursor effect are executed and the reach effect H development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the reach effect I Since the reach effect H, which has a low expectation of a big hit, is executed, the effect can be diversified by combining the type of reach effect and the development notification effect.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in FIGS. 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are used. By deciding whether to execute the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the precursor effect is executed when the execution of the reach effect C is decided than when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Since the ratio of the reach effect I (high expectation reach effect development notification effect) to be executed after that is set high, the reach effect to be executed and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect have a predetermined relationship. It is possible to improve the production of reach production and development notification production.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the super reach ε, the super reach θ, the super reach ι, and the super reach κ, the reach effect to be executed is determined from the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and a variation pattern for executing the reach effect C during the variable display and a variation pattern for executing the reach effect D during the variable display are individually specified. It may be provided in.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, the feature unit 029SG determines whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern at different ratios according to the variable display result. That is, the chance-up effect is the reach effect. As an example of the form executed as an effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit as the effect result of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and during the effect period of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. As for the feasible chance-up effect, it may be feasible as an effect suggesting that any one of reach effect E to reach effect I is executed (development to any of reach effect E to reach effect I). ..

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit and one of the reach effect E to the reach effect I is executed, the big hit game when the variable display result becomes a big hit. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10 rounds, that the game is controlled to a probable change state after the end of the big hit game, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-9, when the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. When the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, the advance effect is executed because a common pre-effect can be executed during the period between the reach effect C or the reach effect D and the development notification effect. As a result, while raising the player's attention to the development notification effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the high-expectation reach effect development notification effect or the reach effect H development notification effect is executed as the development notification effect. You can improve the fun of playing games.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9 and 11-27 to 11-28, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Later, it suggests which of the reach production H development notification effect and the high expectation reach production development notification effect will be executed, and both the reach effect H development notification effect execution and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect execution. Since it is possible to execute the possible branch destination suggestion effect, while raising the player's attention to the fact that the development notification effect is executed by executing the development destination suggestion effect, the reach effect H development notification effect and High expectations Reach production It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the development notification productions is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in this feature unit 029SG, as the development destination suggestion effect, a form in which it is possible to suggest that the reach effect H development notification effect is executed and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest that the reach effect G development notification effect is executed as the development destination suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a development destination suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variation pattern for executing the reach effect C or the reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the reach effect A and the variable display of the variation pattern for executing the reach effect B, the development destination suggestion effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect I are executed before the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. The variable display result is a big hit for the fluctuation pattern of κ and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are executed after the effect result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect D. When this happens, the difference between the rate at which the reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ is 60%, whereas the variation pattern of the super reach θ Since the difference between the ratio at which the reach effect C is executed and the ratio at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of is 40%, the reach effect I depends on whether the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed. Is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which is executed, or a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach effect H is executed, so that the reach effect C and the reach effect can be inferred. It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In the feature unit 029SG, when the variable display result of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is a big hit, the reach effect C is displayed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The difference between the execution rate and the reach effect D execution rate is the difference between the rate at which the reach effect C is executed and the rate at which the reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in the case where the variable display result is out of alignment. The difference between the ratio to be performed and the ratio to execute the reach effect D is larger than the difference between the ratio to execute the reach effect C and the ratio to execute the reach effect D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Will be.

For example, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which a first reserved storage display area 029SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 029SG005U capable of displaying a reserved storage display are provided in the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1, a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5). An active display area 029SG005F that can display the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display may be provided in the center).

Further, when the active display can be displayed in this way, a plurality of active display display modes are provided as in the above-mentioned look-ahead notice effect, and a big hit is expected depending on which display mode the active display is displayed. It may be possible to execute active display effects having different degrees. For example, when three types of active display display modes are provided, a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the display mode of the active display is displayed as a red circle, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It suffices if the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when it is displayed in a high, white circle (big hit expectation in the display mode of active display: red> blue> white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the display mode of the active display is variable during execution due to the change of the red circle. It may be possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation of the display has increased.

When the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display in this way, as shown in FIGS. 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), the variable display result is the effect result of the reach effect B. Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which the reach effect E is executed after the (missing) is once notified, the display mode of the active display is changed from the white circle or the blue circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The changing rate of the red circle is P1.

Further, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A and the reach effect F is further executed, the active display is performed during the execution of the reach effect A. The rate at which the display mode of is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape is P2, and the display mode of the active display is changed from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red shape during the execution of the reach effect F. Let P3 be the rate at which the round shape changes.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect F, is displayed as the active display during the execution of the reach effect E. The mode is P1 which is the rate of change from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle, and the display mode of the active display during the execution of the reach effect A is from the white circle or the blue circle to the red. It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η (when the reach effect A is executed and the reach effect F is executed), the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will be aware in advance that the reach effect F will be executed by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the start. Further, in the case where the reach effect E is executed and the case where the reach effect F is executed, the display mode of the active display is a red circle at a higher rate in the reach effect F, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach effect E. By changing to, the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red circle according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the display mode of the active display is changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the changing ratio P3 is higher than the ratio P2 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 029SG-2, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η as in the modified example 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during the execution of the reach effect F. The display mode of the active display changes from the white round shape or the blue round shape to the red round shape while the reach effect A is being executed. In addition to setting the ratio higher than P2, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E. The ratio P1 may be set higher than the ratio at which the display mode of the active display changes from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle during the execution of the reach effect B.

In this way, a plurality of modes are provided as the active display mode, and the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the jackpot expectation. , The display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the reach effect E development notification effect or the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, so that the player is recognized in advance that the jackpot expectation is high. It is possible to reduce the risk of deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ in which the high-expected reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect I is executed without going through the reach effect such as the reach effect A and the reach effect B. However, as a modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display is changed from a white circle or a blue circle to red before the start of the reach effect I. The ratio P5 that changes to a round shape may be set higher than the ratio P6 that the display mode of the active display changes from a white round shape or a blue round shape to a red round shape after the start of the reach effect I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from the white circle or the blue circle to the red circle before the reach effect I is executed, the player is made to recognize in advance that the reach effect I is executed. Since it can be made easier, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

In this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach effect I. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the ratio P5 to be set is set higher than the ratio P6 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I. Not limited to this, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the reach effect I is executed without going through another reach effect even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle. It is possible to add unexpectedness to the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to the modified example 029SG-3, three types of white round shape, blue round shape, and red round shape are provided as display modes of the hold storage display and the active display. Although the embodiment in which the jackpot expectation is different depending on which display mode the hold storage display or the active display is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display or the active display is not limited to this. The number of display modes may be only two or four or more.

Further, in the modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display can be changed during the execution of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and is active. The change timing of the display mode may include timings other than the execution of the reach effect, for example, the execution of the development suggestion effect and the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, and the like. Further, when it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect including a temporary stop and a re-variable display of a decorative symbol during the variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or the re-variable display.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, three types of a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle are provided as display modes of the hold storage display, depending on which display mode the hold storage display is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. A shape or the like is provided, and it is suggested which of the reach effect E, the reach effect F, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I will be developed depending on which shape the hold memory display is displayed. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process and determines that the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is super reach, which of the super reach α to super reach λ is the fluctuation pattern? (Which of the reach effect A to the reach effect I is to be executed during the variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command (which super reach variation pattern is to be executed) according to the determination is included. The variable category command) may be transmitted to the effect control board 12. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the display mode of the hold storage table display from the round shape, the triangle shape, the quadrangle shape, the star shape, and the like based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. .. In addition, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the hold memory display even before the start of the variable display, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form capable of suggesting a reach effect developed by the shape of the reserved storage display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the color of the reserved storage display is used. In addition to suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit, the shape of the hold memory display may further suggest the reach effect of the development destination. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and the shape of the hold memory display, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-4, a form in which the reach effect of the development destination can be suggested by the shape of the hold storage display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is developed by the shape of the hold storage display. The reach effect that can suggest the destination may be only a part of the reach effect E, the reach effect F, the reach effect G, the reach effect H, and the reach effect I (for example, only the reach effect E and the reach effect I). ..

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a form in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effect A to the reach effect F as a chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black may be changed to red in the middle as a chance-up effect. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation degree image indicating the jackpot expectation degree displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example). , The number of stars displayed as an expectation image may be increased, etc.). By doing so, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters in the reach title image changes from black to red, so that the attention to the expectation image can be increased. It is possible to make the player accurately recognize the degree of expectation of reach production.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although the embodiment in which the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined is illustrated at the same ratio as in the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach κ Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch destination suggestion effect are performed at different ratios depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. It may be possible to determine the production pattern of.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as a modification 029SG-6, before the variable display result is notified as the reach effect C or the reach effect C during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the high expectation reach effect is executed, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is performed at a rate of 15%. Determined, the execution in the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. Execution is determined at a rate of 35%. Further, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, when the reach effect to be executed is determined to be the reach effect D, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined. The execution in the pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution in the pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed (the non-execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower), the reach effect H is set during the execution of the variable display. It is possible to suitably suggest that the development notification effect such as the development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Although the embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set to be higher than that in the case where the above is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is obtained in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. When the execution of the effect C is determined, the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower than when the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. May be good.

In addition, in the present modification 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio in the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z (effect pattern suggesting the execution of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect) is set higher than when it is determined, the variable display is being executed. In the above, it is possible to more preferably suggest that the development notification effect such as the reach effect H development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the super reach κ is exemplified, although the embodiment in which the execution decision ratio in the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than that in the case of When the execution of the reach effect C is determined in the variable display of, the pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is higher than the case where the execution of the reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ. The execution decision ratio may be set low.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-6, as shown in FIGS. 11-59, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Although the embodiment in which the presence / absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined is illustrated at a different ratio from the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach θ, Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch are performed at different ratios depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is the reach effect C or the reach effect D. It may be possible to determine the production pattern of the above-mentioned suggestion production.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-6, the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect C (the first advantageous result suggestion effect in the invention 033SG) and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect D. Although (the second advantageous result suggestion effect in the invention 033SG) is exemplified as an effect that can be executed as an effect of the same effect mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is being executed. The branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of the reach effect D may be feasible as an effect of a different effect mode.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the reach effect E to the reach effect I are used. As for the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-7, reach effect A to reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of super reach, and any one of reach effect E to reach effect I. Regarding the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into, in addition to the first notification mode, after being notified that the variable display result is once out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. A second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) may be provided in which the variable display result is notified as a big hit.

As described above, as the reach effect of the super reach, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. When the notification mode and the second notification mode are provided, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode. The ratio is the same as the ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. May be good.

In this way, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the second notification mode is a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. By providing the above, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player by being notified again that the variable display result is a big hit even though the variable display result is once notified that the variable display result is out of order. Further, the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect depending on whether the effect result (variable display result) when the reach effect C and the reach effect D are executed is notified in the first notification mode or the second notification mode. Since the process for determining the above can be standardized, the amount of data required for the process can be suppressed.

In this modification 029SG-7, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the modes, the branch destination suggestion effect is a pattern when the effect results (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the first notification mode. The ratio of execution in Z and the ratio of branch destination suggestion effect executed in pattern Z when the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode are Although the same embodiment is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and any one of the reach effect E to the reach effect I is performed. When the first notification mode and the second notification mode are provided as the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing into, the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D is the first notification mode. The ratio at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z when notified in, and the branch destination when the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. The rate at which the suggestion effect is performed in pattern Z may be different.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed as the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without developing into any of the reach effect E to the reach effect I. Regarding the modes, the first notification mode in which any one of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the variable display result is temporarily removed as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. As -8, the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, and after being notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are performed. Is executed, and it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect G (when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ big hit). The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is variable in which the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. It may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed on the display. By doing so, when the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, the execution ratio of the chance-up effect depends on whether the reach effect G is executed before the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit. Because it is possible to make different games, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in this modification, the ratio of the chance-up effect being executed during the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is the second notification mode in which the effect result (variable display result) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D is. Although a form different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is illustrated in the variable display notified in, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is in progress. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display in which the effect results (variable display results) of the reach effect C and the reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-27, the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of effect patterns, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed depending on which effect pattern the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. High expectations Reach production We have illustrated a form in which the rate at which the development notification production is executed differs. In particular, in the feature unit 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is limited to this. When the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99% rate).

In particular, in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed at an extremely high rate when the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the effect pattern Z, the branch destination suggestion effect is the effect pattern. When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed even though it is executed in Z, or when the reach effect I is executed even though the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed (so-called). A pattern of production contradiction) may be provided. When such a pattern of effect contradiction is provided, the branch destination suggestion effect or reach effect I in the effect pattern Z is executed only when it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to give a surprising feeling to the player, and when the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in the pattern Z or the reach effect I is executed, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (offset) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are further notified. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which the above is executed, an example is shown in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are different. Not limited to this, as in the modified example 029SG-10, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D may be the same for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing so, in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect D is executed, the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. Since the player can expect that the reach effect development notification effect is executed after it is performed, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 029SG-10, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are the same for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ is illustrated. Is not limited to this, and the variable display result is (missing) as the effect result of the reach effect C and the reach effect D in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect D is executed. ) Is notified, and if it is possible to achieve an effect that the player can expect that the reach effect development notification effect is executed, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D are achieved. (For example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D. Are almost the same) and may be different.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G development notification effect and the reach effect G are further notified. For the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ in which is executed, the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect C is decided is smaller than the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, when it is decided to execute the reach effect C for the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ. The jackpot expectation may be the same as the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect D is determined. By doing so, in both the case where the reach effect C is executed and the case where the reach effect is executed, when the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, the variable display result is obtained as the effect result of the reach effect G. Since the player can expect to be notified that the game will be a big hit, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the present modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation when the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the jackpot when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Although the embodiment in which the degree of expectation is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is not limited to this, and the reach effect C is executed and the reach effect is executed in both cases. Reach if it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a big hit as the effect result of the reach effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed. The difference between the jackpot expectation of the production C and the jackpot expectation of the reach production D is small (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation of the reach production C and the jackpot expectation of the reach production D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the reach production. The jackpot expectation of C and the jackpot expectation of reach effect D may be substantially the same).

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, the red display of the reach title, the operation of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the stick as the operation promotion image are used as the effects constituting the chance-up effect. The image of the controller 31A can be displayed, and the reach effect E development notification effect and the high expectation reach effect A to reach effect D, and the reach effect E development notification effect and high expectation are executed before the reach effect development notification effect. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F executed before the reach effect development notification effect. As a modification 029SG-12, a common effect of the red display of these reach titles and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F. The jackpot expectation may be different depending on the height. By doing so, while suppressing the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as the chance-up effect (the number of effect patterns of the chance-up effect), the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are the execution of either reach effect. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not he / she is squeezed inside, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-34, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect of the chance-up effect are different depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. Although the form in which the pattern can be determined has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence / absence of execution of the chance-up effect and the effect pattern of the chance-up effect are any one of reach effect E to reach effect I. May be determined at different rates depending on whether or not is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as a modification 029SG-13, the high expectation reach effect development notification is made before the variable display result (off) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ in which the effect and the reach effect I are executed, the chance-up effect is performed at different ratios depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is decided and the execution of the reach effect D is decided. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute. In particular, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, when the execution of the reach effect D is decided, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a higher rate than when the execution of the reach effect C is decided. When the execution of the reach effect D is decided, it is possible to suggest to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode in which the variable display result is once again notified that the variable display result is a big hit after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D. An embodiment in which (a so-called resurrection mode) is provided is illustrated, but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (A) as a modified example 029SG-14, it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order. After that, a revival effect may be executed to notify that the variable display result is a big hit between the variable display stop timing and the like.

In particular, when the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D (variation of any one of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ). When variable display is executed in the pattern and a big hit occurs), as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the effect period of the revival effect is set to reach effect. When the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect E are executed after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of B (variable by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ). (When display is executed) Reach effect E The length of the period from the start timing of the development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (variable display result notification timing) L22, and the effect results of reach effect C and reach effect D. When the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the reach effect G development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed after being notified that the variable display result is out of order (variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ). If the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G (variable display result notification timing) is set shorter than L23, the effect becomes redundant. It may be possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the above (L22> L21, L23> 21).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the effect period of the revival effect is set from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect to the reach effect E development notification effect. By setting it shorter than the length L32 of the period until the end timing of, or the length L33 from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G development notification effect, the variable display result can be displayed. It is possible to give unexpectedness to the fact that the notification is out of order.

Further, in the present modification 029SG-14, a mode in which the revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect A to the reach effect D is illustrated. When the high expectation reach effect development notification effect and the reach effect F are executed from the execution of the reach effect A (variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η and becomes a big hit). In the case), when the advance effect, the precursor effect, the reach effect H development notification effect, and the reach effect H are executed from the execution of the reach effect C and the reach effect D (variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι). When the reach effect C or reach effect D is being executed, the advance effect, the precursor effect, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect, and the reach effect I are executed (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ). In the case where the display is executed and a big hit is obtained), a case where the revival effect is executed may be provided.

As shown in the feature unit 029SG, the ratio of the reach effect A to the reach effect D being executed and becoming a big hit (the degree of expectation of a big hit) is such that the reach effect F, the reach effect G, and the reach effect I are executed and the big hit. Since it is set lower than the ratio (big hit expectation), when the variable display result is a big hit, it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order as the effect result of reach effect A to reach effect D. By setting the ratio at which the revival effect is executed after that to be higher than the ratio at which the reach effect F, the reach effect G, and the reach effect I are executed and become a big hit, the reach effect A to the reach effect D are executed and variable. Even when it is notified that the display result is out of alignment, the player may be able to pay attention to the execution of the resurrection effect.

After the reach effect B is once notified that the variable display result is out of alignment as the effect result of the reach effect B, the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect E are executed to become a big hit. In the case (when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ and a big hit is obtained), or after being notified once that the variable display result is out of order as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, the reach effect G The revival effect is also executed when the development suggestion effect, the reach effect G, the development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed and a big hit is obtained (when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach θ and the big hit is obtained). A case may be provided, but in the case where the variable display is executed in these fluctuation patterns of super reach ζ and super reach θ, it is notified that the variable display result will be out of order once before the revival effect. In order to suppress the risk that the effect will be redundant and the game entertainment will be reduced by being notified twice or more that the variable display result will be out of order as the effect of the reach effect, super reach ζ or super If the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of reach θ and it becomes a big hit, the revival effect is not executed, or the fluctuation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ The revival effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Further, the feature unit 029SG exemplifies a mode in which the time can be controlled to a shorter time after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the variable display is executed is a specific number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.). ) May be controlled in a time-saving state, or in the case where the variable display result is out of order, it may be possible to control in a time-saving state according to the fact that some of the outliers are derived and displayed. good.

In particular, in this way, in the case of controlling the time saving state according to the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number of times, or in the case of controlling the time saving state according to the derivation display of a part of the deviation. , The high expectation reach effect development notification effect shown in the feature unit 029SG, or the effect of notifying that the time is controlled after executing the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 may be executed. .. By doing so, when controlling the time saving state according to the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number of times, or when controlling the time saving state according to the derivation display of a part of the deviation. , High expectation reach effect Whether it is controlled to a shorter time state by executing development notification effect or revival effect, or whether it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, reach effect with high expectation such as reach effect I Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the game is executed, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, as the feature portion 029SG, an embodiment in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are carried out is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and only one of the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG is carried out. You may try to do it.

Further, the feature unit 029SG illustrates a mode in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be considered that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled, a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, a first suggestion effect) having a lower expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. Execute a plurality of types of suggestion effects including reach effect A), second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E). Possible suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10) and
The special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η). In the variable display, the portion where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), the special development after being notified that the effect of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. A special development effect different from the effect can be executed as the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result as the effect result of the reach effect B (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). The development effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10), which is the part where the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the loss) is once notified.
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect (for example). , As shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A, and the reach effect F is further executed). ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8, super reach. In the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of ζ, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the effect result of the reach effect B), and the reach effect E is further executed).
The effect period of the special development effect is longer than the effect period of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). L7 is the length of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect longer than L6b),
The special development effect is a first effect (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, and an effect executed after the first effect. There is a second effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the previous stage information is visually displayed, and an effect executed after the second effect, which is the first stage. Including a third effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the latter information having a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (notification timing of the variable display result). The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F are the reach effect E development notification effect start timing to the reach effect E end timing ( The length of the period until the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than L11),
Moreover,
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and
As the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display in step S172. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect vibrate. Examples thereof include gaming machines having different modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44).
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the notification that the special development effect is controlled is excessively lengthened, which is a hobby of the game. In the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, the player is preferably paid attention to the special suggestion effect until it is notified that the special development effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Because it can be made to play, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

In other words, it is possible to prevent the period until it is notified that the control is controlled to the advantageous state to be excessively long, and depending on the type of the development effect, the length of the effect period and the advantageous state after the development effect is executed. The period until it is notified that it is controlled changes, and the notification that it is controlled to the development effect and the advantageous state is executed in the effect period of an appropriate length according to the type of the development effect. Whether or not the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state in a light emitting mode, whether or not the vibration effect is executed at the execution timing, and whether or not the special vibration effect is executed along with the execution of the specific effect. Can be noticed. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the gaming machine when installed in the amusement park and is easy to attract the interest of the player.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player.
Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) and
As the vibration effect that the operating means vibrates, a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern) are used. A vibration effect execution means (for example, an operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 or a variable display effect control pattern vibration control data) that can execute a vibration effect execution means (for example, driving a vibration motor 131) is used to produce a variable display in step S172. CPU 120 for effect control that executes processing, etc.) and
In the light emitting effect executing means (for example, step AKS203) capable of executing a light emitting effect (for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120, etc., which executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in
Based on a specific effect execution means (for example, a variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific effect (for example, SP reach A reach effect, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (Such as the effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172).
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed (for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like). The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern). (Big hit reliability according to the application of the operation part production pattern, etc.),
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect vibrate. Examples thereof include gaming machines having different modes (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example of the form.

(Example of other forms)

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Will be. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 after the special symbol process process is completed. To.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various decisions based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the decision value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the decision result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not the display result is "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the process of determining. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol variation processing, the processing for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol are performed. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of rounds to be executed with the big winning opening open has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit game state when the maximum number of executions has been reached. It includes the process of making settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probable change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings for starting control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the large winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of the big hit and the payout rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is gradually. .. If the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 13 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 13 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. The configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining a display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled in the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special map, the probability determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special map display result as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 are set. In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is a probable change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value is set. In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320 and the probability change state is 65%, which is a game property (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game performance (so-called V) in which the ratio of the gaming ball passing through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game is different according to the fluctuation special map. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios according to the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in, for example, the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, the mode thereof, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands (illuminated signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time for the command has elapsed without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the small hit game state. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly by using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 15-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as a usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and the other hold numbers "2" to "2" are deleted. The hold display in the display area corresponding to "4" or the like is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is started immediately based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of hold storages is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 15-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is terminated. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "missing", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so as to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right". At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach where the variable display result becomes "missing", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. When the variable display result is a "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decoration pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As the result becomes lower, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2 number, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative design becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative design corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, 6 As the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the rate of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". The number of determination values assigned to each decorative symbol to be a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed or "with effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the determination result of step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined to "have an effect" to execute the setting suggestion effect (step S226). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 15-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 15-3 as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the determination table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. ..

FIG. 15-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion content of these setting suggestion patterns differs depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the player has a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 15-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 15-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed by the pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is obtained. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a symbol display mode of 7. It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continued, and the suggestions regarding the set values will be made.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to the copper color. In this way, as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image, or any other effect image, output of sound by speakers 8L, 8R, lighting of decorative light emitters such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operation of movable members for effect, and the like. It may change the production mode by any production device such as a combination of a part or all. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data obtained by combining these are predetermined for performing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies one or more conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called the change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value.

FIG. 15-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display. In the effect processing during variable display, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control for executing various effects is performed as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as a movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242). In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the advance notice effect period (step S242; No), or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach effect period (step S244; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect is executed after the symbol display color is changed, the control of the jackpot gaming state is suggested and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. It is possible to make suggestions regarding the set value.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as the execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), after the control of step S247 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern is variable based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern RE- In the case of 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when a player notifies an advantageous effect (advantageous effect), the player takes an image or a video of the effect on a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in unfavorable cases (unfavorable productions), since the motivation for shooting is not aroused, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will be uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce the discomfort. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect when the effect advantageous to the player is executed, and it is possible to secure the shooting time. Further, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3" which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S252), the variable display effect process is terminated.

FIG. 15-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 15-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. When the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 15-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach effect of normal reach shifts to the reach effect of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 15-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 15-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0. FIG. 15-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 15-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color changes to silver due to the pattern RE-2. FIG. 15-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and the display color remains red, which is the normal display color. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6 which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. In the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of making a suggestion regarding the set value of the gaming machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the interest in pachinko.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state and is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may make a suggestion regarding a probabilistic state controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature 10SH)
Next, the feature portion 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes an operating means that can be operated by the player. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, a timing T2 at which the reach is established, and a normal reach after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of the timing T1 and the timing T2 or the timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4. It is possible to execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and the emission color are common.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect of the super reach.

The vibration effect executing means according to the feature unit 10SH can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature unit 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various effects images.

The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect according to the feature unit 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the always small symbol, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and has a higher priority than the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative symbol.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 16-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature portion 10SH, and shows the layout of the main members.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for a game effect is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be vibrable by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is composed of, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight having a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or at a position close to the push button 31B. In addition, in order to make the vibration mode of the push button 31B various, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L and 9R have a plurality of LEDs built in along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 16-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on / off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R, drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, 9R based on the lamp signal, and has a game effect in a mode specified by the lamp signal. Turn on / off the lamps 9B, 9L, 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls lighting / extinguishing of the lamp. The lighting / extinguishing of the lamp may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies the motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 16-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process related to the feature unit 10SH. The effect control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 16-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display variation pattern to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display, and are specified by the effect control command analyzed by the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the variation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the effect random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random number update process is used.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect that is not linked to the advance notice effect. In the process of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration effect is executed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed, by the random number value and the lottery by the table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. It suffices that the determination value to be compared with the random value is assigned to the determination result of the presence / absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is, for example, (probability that effect A is executed when the display result is "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") / {(display result). Probability that production A is executed when is a "big hit") x (probability that the display result is "big hit") + (probability that production A is executed when the display result is not "big hit") x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "big hit")}.

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is performed when the display result is "big hit" so that the jackpot reliability corresponding to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value. It suffices to specify the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "big hit".

(Contents of vibration production and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 16-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has execution patterns SE1 to SE1 according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of vibration effects of SE10.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T2 where the reach is established. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at the timing T2 where the reach is established.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment has a timing T3 in which a normal reach reach effect is being executed and a timing T4 in which a super reach reach effect is being executed after the timing T1 and the timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration effect at the timing T4 during the execution of the reach effect of the super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed while the reach effect of the super reach is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, or the super reach reach effect. Regardless of the timing T4, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted. It is possible to carry out a vibration effect in which the light is emitted in red. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE1, SE5, SE8 as the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. Is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light. Is.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. Vibration effect can be executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the vibration effect of the execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in rainbow colors. It is possible.

Then, in this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds as compared with the case where the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed. The jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red is executed. Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in the mode of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is "big hit". Is definitely notified.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to pay attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit white light is executed, and when the push button 31B is vibrated and pushed for 3 seconds. When the vibration effect in which the button 31B emits light in red is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the normal reach reach effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is executed more than when it is executed at the timing T3 during the execution. The jackpot reliability is high. Further, even in the case of the vibration effect of the same aspect, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, it is executed more than when it is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , The jackpot reliability is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Further, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at the timing T1, the reach effect of the super reach is performed instead of the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. It is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T4 during execution. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed is further increased. be able to.

It should be noted that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the execution of the reach effect of the normal reach may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Further, when it is possible to execute a plurality of types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effects, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effects is , It suffices if it is higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the normal reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of normal reach.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach. Further, when it is possible to execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the jackpot of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of the super reach being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of the reach effect of any kind of super reach.

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect can be regarded as a chance-up effect. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed by vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors. And it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 where the reach is established, instead of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, when the vibration effect is not actually executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 where the reach is established can be further increased.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to change the expectation that the vibration effect is executed in a complicated manner as the variable display of the decorative pattern progresses.

Further, the probability that the vibration effect of the mode in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit light in rainbow colors is sufficiently low as compared with the probability that the vibration effect of the other mode is executed. By prescribing it, it is possible to enhance the interest when it is definitely notified that the display result will be a "big hit".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chance of recognizing that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 16-3, after that, according to the determination result of step 10SHS2, the effect control CPU 120 performs the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the super reach reach effect in this variable display. It is determined whether or not to execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect is produced. The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance effect is an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect by a random number value and a lottery using a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10 SHS4, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect at the same ratio regardless of which mode the vibration effect is.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In addition, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect.

According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be focused on before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently enhanced.

On the other hand, when the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, the relief effect may be executed after the display result of "off" is displayed, and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, when the display result of the previous variable display is derived and displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started even though the variable display of this time is started. There is a possibility of giving a misunderstanding as if the relief effect was executed in the previous variable display. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, it is possible to prevent such a misunderstanding.

Further, if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has become the predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol has become a predetermined reach mode. ..

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 16-3, when the vibration effect is not executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as reach effects, the mode of the effects to be executed, and the like (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the presence or absence of execution of various effects such as advance notice effects and the mode thereof are determined by lottery. At this time, by making the decision ratio in the lottery different according to the display result of this time, the fluctuation pattern of this time, etc., the jackpot reliability is made different depending on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and its mode. Further, when the current pattern specifies the reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern is executed.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the effect determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer value corresponding to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the effect control process timer, and the type and mode of the effect determined to be executed. The effect specific data for specifying the effect and the execution timing specific timer value indicating the effect execution timing by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in the timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of effects determined to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect specific data and the execution timing specific timer value in the timer value storage area for each effect.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol that derives the determined final stop symbol and the mode specified by the current variation pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives an instruction and starts variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

After that, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 10SHS8), the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and production period of vibration effect and line-of-sight guidance effect)
FIG. 16-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and the effect period of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the vibration effect at any of the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect. In that case, it is possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

When the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 starts the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T3. , The vibration effect is started when the timing T3 is reached. Similarly, when the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guidance effect before executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance is performed 4 seconds before the timing T4. The production is started, and the vibration production is started when the timing T4 is reached. The effect period of the line-of-sight guidance effect of this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed for the first second.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
16-6 and 16-7 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect. In this effect operation example, an example of executing the vibration effect at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed will be described.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a plurality of types of super reach reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 starts the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed when the reach is established is reduced and displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A), the “left” reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. And, when the reach is established, the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R, is displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, the variable display of the small symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The effect image showing a small pattern is also referred to as a broadcast information image. Therefore, in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect image showing the small symbol to be the broadcast information image is variably displayed, and the effect image showing the confirmed small symbol as the display result is displayed. Derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small symbol different from the decorative symbol is performed. During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the display result, the variable display of the small symbol is continuously performed in a certain display mode, and disappears from the screen or is a shield. It is not shielded by. Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK is also referred to as a constant small symbol or a small symbol for directing. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, a plurality of decorative symbols that can be identified by a display mode in which a part or all of them are common to each of a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, a symbol that indicates a number as well as a part that indicates a number in the decorative symbol. An effect image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a broadcast information image. The small symbol may be displayed only when the decorative symbol is hidden. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the variable display of the small symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 16-6 (A) instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It may be displayed in the lower left corner of.

A special symbol, a decorative symbol, and a fourth symbol following the normal symbol are provided, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. In the variable display of the fourth symbol, for example, in the fourth symbol display area provided on or outside the screen of the image display device 5, display and non-display are repeated at regular time intervals with a specific display color. It is realized by continuing the display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbol may be displayed in a mode that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have a display screen of the image display device 5, such as the right side of the game area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 16-1. Is provided at a remote location. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to confirm the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the display result is inside and whether or not the display result is derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, whether or not the variable display is in progress is determined. Whether or not the display result is derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, in this example, the hold display area 10SHH for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and the active display area 10SH for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. , Is displayed. When the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SH may not be displayed.

Further, a hold number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the hold number display area 10SHHS, as in the hold display area 10SHH, the hold number of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. The display mode is a mode in which it is displayed by an arithmetic numeral.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guidance effect 4 seconds before the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, an effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual effect as a line-of-sight guidance effect.

In this example, the effect control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (B). do.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (B) to (D), the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings up the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (B) to (D) in accordance with the action of the character swinging up the hammer. Lights so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 16-7 (E) and 16-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 uses the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. 16-7 (E) and 16-7 (F) in accordance with the action of the character swinging down the hammer. Lights the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of hammers that the character swings down to hit the button image 10SHB and imitates a star from the button image 10SHB at the timing T4. The mode of various images is changed so that the effect image 10SHS of the "star" of the above is scattered. Further, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (G), the effect control CPU 120 starts the vibration effect when the timing T4 is reached, vibrates the push button 31B, and is built in the push button 31B. The game effect lamps 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after the timing T4, the effect control CPU 120 ends the line-of-sight guidance effect as shown in FIG. 16-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect elapses, the effect control CPU 120 ends the vibration effect, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and has a game effect lamp built in the push button 31B. 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 16-1. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the effect of the display on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and whether the push button 31B is vibrating or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not. On the other hand, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, the push button 31B can be focused on before the push button 31B vibrates, and the push button 31B can be pushed. It is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the button 31B and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is always set lower than that of the small symbol or the holding number display. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbol or the number of pending numbers among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the constant small symbol displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, always has a lower priority than the small symbol.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-7 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the back side of the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the hold number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the hold display, the active display, the background image, and the decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guidance effect on the layer on the front side of the layer for displaying the background image or the decorative pattern among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (B) to 16-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB are displayed on the front side of the background image 10SHY of the "mountain landscape". It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the displays of the line-of-sight guidance effect, have higher priority than the background image 10SHY of the "mountain scenery".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is a display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (D), the effect image 10SHS of the "star" is displayed on the front side of the "left" reach decoration symbol 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration symbol 10SH5R. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect, has a higher priority than the reach decoration symbol 10SH5L of the "left" and the reach decoration symbol 10SH5R of the "right".

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SH, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the hold display.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (G), the effect image 10SHS of "star" is displayed on the front side of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the line-of-sight guidance effect is produced. It can be said that the effect image 10SHS of the "star", which is the display of, has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be conspicuous while the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display is suitably ensured at all times.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (B) to 16-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed and the line-of-sight guidance effect is displayed. The high-priority constant small symbols and the number of holdings are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be made more conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbol and the holding number display more preferably. ..

(Modification example of feature part 10SH)
The invention according to the feature portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 of FIG. 16-3, the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be set according to which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the vibration effect this time is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light, or the push button 31B is pressed for 3 seconds. Depending on whether the vibration effect is such that the push button 31B is vibrated over a period of 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, or the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow color. The presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance effect may be determined at different ratios. Here, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit red light is executed, it is easy to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect. Further, when the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit light in rainbow colors is executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is always executed. That is, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect having higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked to the advance notice effect. In this case, as the vibration effect linked with the notice effect, there are a plurality of types depending on the combination of the interlocking notice effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the emission color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect. It may be possible to carry out the vibration effect of. Depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a bonus advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Then, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect linked with a highly reliable character advance notice effect. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking accessory notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as a chance-up effect in the character advance notice effect.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked with other highly reliable advance notice effects. This vibration effect is an effect of vibrating the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the notice effect and causing the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the interlocking notice effect. According to such a configuration, the vibration effect can be used as an effect of increasing the chance in the advance notice effect.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after the definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived, the gaming ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or a winning opening. By doing so, the jackpot gaming state may be started. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery effect that notifies the upper limit of the number of rounds executed in the big hit game state when a game ball that has passed through a specific area is detected. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect. This vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, and is executed in the big hit game state. Notify that the maximum number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored effect. It may be deterministically notified that the maximum number of rounds executed in the gaming state is the maximum number of rounds among the plurality of options. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect linked with the round lottery effect.

The effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11 or when an error is detected in the effect control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 and a process of outputting an error notification voice from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The effect control CPU 120 can display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance effect. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed when the error notification image is displayed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the time. Further, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer than when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. , It is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between the timing before the reference timing and the timing after the reference timing with reference to a certain timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol, which is the timing before the timing T2, is started with the timing T2 at which the reach is established as a reference. , The timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, which is the timing after the timing T2, and the timing T4 during the super reach reach effect are set to 3 seconds. The vibration time at the timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at the timing before the timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be different. For example, there are a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a first strength and a case where the push button 31B is vibrated with a second strength larger than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength. When making the push button 31B vibrate with the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the strength of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effect and the reliability of the jackpot may be common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern and the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed in each of the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the vibration effect.

In addition to this, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is the first mode and the second mode. , The jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice, may be different. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time, and a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. Make the jackpot reliability different in the variable display before execution, which is the target of the look-ahead notice. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect.

Alternatively, when the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is a plurality of capable of executing the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only at any one of the timings of. For example, the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed only at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a look-ahead notice can be executed, the vibration effect is announced as a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution. Can be suitably recognized as having been executed.

When the vibration effect is executed as the look-ahead advance notice effect at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is executed, the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the advance notice effect may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect. For example, when the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead notice effect is 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a warning effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continuously vibrates for a predetermined time, and the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a look-ahead notice effect. The vibration mode of the above is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. According to such a configuration, any of the cases where the vibration effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed at the timing when the vibration effect as the advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution can be executed. It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model, it is executed at a specific timing. Even if the mode of the vibration effect executed by the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the aspect of the vibration effect executed by the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 are different, a big hit. The reliability may be common. For example, regarding the vibration effect executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model. Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the executed vibration effect is different, the jackpot reliability is 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the models of the pachinko gaming machines 1 are different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect executed at that time, for example, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed. For example, at the timing T2 when the reach is established, when the notification effect for notifying that the reach is established is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated while the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed, a sense of unity is generated between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the same execution pattern of vibration effect and jackpot reliability, vibration of the same execution pattern Regarding the production, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when the vibration effect is executed as an effect of increasing the chance of another effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect. While making adjustments, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, the effect control CPU 120 has higher jackpot reliability than the reach mode after the decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination, which is not a jackpot combination, is temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. It is possible to carry out a fanning effect that encourages the development of a reach mode. There are cases where the reach mode with high jackpot reliability develops after the fanning effect is executed, and there are cases where the display result becomes "missing" without developing into the reach mode with high jackpot reliability. When developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning success effect that notifies that the effect of the fanning effect is developed into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. On the other hand, when the display result is "off" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the effect of the fanning effect does not develop into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. Perform a fanning failure production. In executing such a fanning effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing of executing the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful fanning effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the fanning success effect may be adjusted so as to match the image of the fanning success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful fanning effect is executed.

The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful fanning effect is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the effect may be the same emission color as the emission color. According to such a configuration, when the fanning success effect is executed, the display result may be "missing" even if it develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, but the jackpot reliability is excessively increased. It is possible to suppress the increase.

Further, when the display result is "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing immediately before the definite decorative symbol, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, not only can the interest be improved at the timing immediately before the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, but also the expectation for the vibration effect itself is increased, and the vibration effect is executed at other timings as well. It is possible to improve the interest of the time.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second model different from the first model share the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, it is advantageous to the player. The emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect can be "rainbow color" even when the jackpot type is different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among the multiple types of jackpots with different characteristics. do. According to such a configuration, when the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is not misunderstood as if it is the "big hit" of the big hit type having the highest advantage. Can be.

When there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible not to provide an execution pattern in which the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is "rainbow color". According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the push button 31B from becoming a "big hit" of a big hit type, which has a low advantage for the player, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration effect. It is possible to prevent the expectation for the vibration effect from being impaired.

The effect control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by utilizing an auditory effect as a line-of-sight guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when the vibration effect is being executed, and then gradually changes the specific sound effect from a low volume to a loud volume as a line-of-sight guidance effect. Output to change. According to such a configuration, a player who has difficulty in recognizing a line-of-sight guidance effect using a visual effect can be focused on the operation means before the operation means vibrates.

In the case where the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is used, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may differ from one time to another. For example, even if the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the set value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the execution pattern may be higher than when the set value is "1". .. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result becomes a "big hit", it is possible to raise the expectation that the set value has a high degree of advantage.

In the case where the winning probability of the jackpot changes according to the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect depends on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emission color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the set value is any of "1" to "3" and when the set value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect It suffices if the vibration time and emission color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the vibration effect is a high setting that may be the setting value “6” that is most advantageous to the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not the set value is an even number that may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player by the vibration effect.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. It may be possible to carry out a vibration effect in a mode of emitting light. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 in which the reach is established, it is possible to pay attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the mode when the vibration effect is executed.

Even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is red. When the vibration effect of the mode of emitting light is enabled, the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established. It may happen. In that case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit rainbow colors is not executed at any of the timings T1 and T2, the vibration at the timing T1 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T2 is a specific combination, it may be deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, not only can the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T2 where the reach is established can be increased, but also the attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T2 can be further increased. ..

The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed and the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow colors at any timing of the timing T3 and the timing T4 is not executed, the vibration at the timing T3 is performed. When the combination of the effect execution pattern and the vibration effect execution pattern at the timing T4 is a specific combination, it may be deterministically notified that the display result is a "big hit". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during the normal reach reach effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit rainbow-colored vibration. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible not only to raise the expectation that the vibration effect is executed at the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, but also to pay more attention to the mode of the vibration effect at the timing T4. Can be enhanced.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is "big hit" is the vibration effect of not deterministically notifying that the display result is "big hit". It may be different from the vibration time and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the above. For example, in the vibration effect in which the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of deterministically notifying that the display result is "big hit" is not deterministically notified that the display result is "big hit". The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the mode in which the display result is not deterministically notified that the display result is the "big hit" is monotonous, whereas the display result is deterministically notified that the display result is the "big hit". In the vibration effect of the above mode, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined time signature. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration effect in the mode of deterministically notifying that the display result is a "big hit" is a special vibration effect.

When the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 during which the normal reach reach effect is being executed or at the timing T4 during which the super reach reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed without fail. According to such a configuration, the expectation that the display result becomes a "big hit" due to the execution of the reach effect is suitably increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means. be able to.

When the vibration effect is executed at any of the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started and the timing T2 at which the reach is established, the timing T3 during which the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed, and the timing T3. The vibration effect may be executed at any of the timing T4 during which the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 and the timing T2. Or, the execution pattern of the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is executed at the timing T3, and the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is executed at the timing T4. To limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When the vibration effect linked to the notice effect can be executed, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the notice effect and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect may be different. For example, in the vibration effect linked to the advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the beat of the music played in the interlocking advance notice effect. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the character advance notice effect, the push button 31B is vibrated according to the sound effect when the character is operating. Further, for example, in the vibration effect linked to the notice effect, the push button 31B is made to emit light in a color different from the emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect not linked to the notice effect. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to the notice effect or not linked to the notice effect. ..

The present box production may be feasible. In that case, when the present box is opened, a character having a hammer as shown in FIG. 16-6 (B) may pop out from the opened present box, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation that the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed due to the execution of the present box effect.

When the operation effect for operating the push button 31B can be executed, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective during the operation valid period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effective, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on in a manner different from the lighting mode. For example, when the push button 31B is turned on in the vibration effect, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the push button 31B is continuously emitted in red for 3 seconds to vibrate the push button 31B. .. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is turned on in the operation effect, the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. It may be controlled so that the lighting mode is for suggestion. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is effective. In addition, in order to notify that the operation of the operation lever is effective during the lever operation valid period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is effective, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on. In this case, the lighting mode may be controlled so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the lever operation valid period to suggest a lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting button operation.

For example, when the special figure game or the like is not executed, the push button 31B or the like is operated by the player to, for example, set the volume of the effect to be executed, set the type of the output music or background, and display the image. It may be possible to change the settings related to the effect, such as the brightness setting of the device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. For example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from the menu screen, or the player may perform a different operation corresponding to the desired change item, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. Further, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed when the special figure game or the like is not executed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is turned on, and the push button 31B in the operation effect is turned on in a mode different from the lighting mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the setting related to the effect can be changed.

(Explanation of means related to feature unit 10SH)
In relation to the feature unit 10SH, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and that can perform a vibration effect in which the operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-05107 5).

Generally, a player plays a game while looking at a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, when the operating means is not in the player's field of view, it may not be possible to recognize that the operating means is vibrating even if the vibration effect is executed. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effect is executed and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 10SH can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player. It is a machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, etc.), and an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a player. Is provided with a push button 31B capable of performing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like), a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a push button 31B). A line-of-sight guidance effect executing means that can execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a player's It is possible to execute a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The expectation is high (for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed), and the vibration effect executing means is , The vibration effect can be executed at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the timing T1 at which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , Timing T2 where reach is established, timing T3 during execution of normal reach reach effect after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing during execution of super reach reach effect. The vibration effect can be executed at any of the timings of T4 and the like), and the vibration effect is performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 is at any timing of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any timing of timing T3 and timing T4. However, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emission color are common), and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means does not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the first timing ( For example, production control The CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, do not execute the line-of-sight guidance effect at the timing T1 and the timing T2) (for example, for effect control). The CPU 120 is characterized in that the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed before the vibration effect is executed at the timing T3 and the timing T4).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operation means before the vibration effect is executed, and to sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 10SH is the gaming machine of the means 1, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed (for example, effect control). The CPU 120 may perform the vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect is generated, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 10SH is a specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the line-of-sight guidance effect in the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2. , The ability to execute the reach effect of the super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect executing means can execute the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120). The vibration effect can be executed while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed).

According to such a configuration, the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is executed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images. The display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, an effect image of the line-of-sight guidance effect). Is always lower in priority than small symbols, hold number display, various error notifications, hold display, active display, background image, higher priority than decorative symbols, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guidance effect can be conspicuous while suitably ensuring the visibility of predetermined information.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 10SH is any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, and the vibration effect executing means has the vibration effect of the first aspect and the advantageous state over the first aspect. It is possible to execute the vibration effect of the second aspect, which suggests that the degree of expectation to be controlled is high (for example, the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the push button 31B for 1.5 seconds and push button 31B. It is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in white and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits light in red, and the push button 31B is caused to emit light for 1.5 seconds. When the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causing the push button 31B to emit red light is executed, rather than when the vibration effect of vibrating and causing the push button 31B to emit light in white is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, pachinko game). In the machine 1, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. At the same time, it may be easier to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits light in red).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve the expectation that the vibration effect of the second aspect is executed.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration related to the feature unit 10SH may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature unit. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

(Explanation of featured parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 17-1 shows a configuration example of the effect device related to the feature portions 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for effect, which is a movable effect device, is provided in front of the lower end, which is a lower edge portion on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operating motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting the power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be capable of changing its position by power from, for example, a solenoid for operation or another general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is configured by using a decorative member, and has a configuration capable of covering the display screen of the image display device 5 so that the player cannot see the display screen. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed by using transparent glass or synthetic resin or as a simple opening, and has a structure capable of being seen through so that the player can visually recognize the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built in the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or wholly formed of a translucent member. As a result, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light by turning on the lever lamp 9B1. Further, by turning on the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be made to emit light.

For example, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are integrally formed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated by driving the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside the push button 31B or at a position close to the push button 31, may be built in the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, or may be provided at the root position of the operation lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to execute an operation unit effect including a light emission effect accompanying a vibration effect as a suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit game state. In the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect, one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, and one of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit light according to the vibration effect. May be good. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be made to emit light with the vibration effect.

FIG. 17-2 (A) shows a setting example of the operation unit effect pattern used to execute the operation unit effect. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation unit effect patterns, operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. The emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and usage are set according to each operation unit effect pattern. The emission color corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates a vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state when the operation unit effect corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern is executed. The usage corresponding to the operation unit effect pattern indicates the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed for each operation unit effect pattern.

The operation unit effect can be executed at a plurality of timings accompanying the progress of the variable display, for example, at the start of the pre-variation, at the start of the target variation, at the time of establishing the reach, at the time of developing the reach, and at the time of inciting the hit / fail notification. The start of the pre-variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. The target fluctuation start time is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation unit effect. When the reach is established, it is the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. The reach development is the timing corresponding to the case where the development production is executed along with the reach production of the super reach. The development effect is an effect that notifies that the reach effect of the super reach is executed (development of the reach) after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. The hit / fail notification fanning is the timing corresponding to the fanning effect prior to the hit / miss notification effect that notifies whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" while the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 17-2 (A), a plurality of operation unit effect patterns that can be used to execute the operation unit effect according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation unit effect patterns can be used according to a plurality of timings at which the operation unit effect can be executed.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when only the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and the reach effect of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. As the reach effect of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach effects including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach effect may include an effect having different production modes from each other. Each reach effect may include an effect having a common effect mode to each other. The decision rate when the variable display result is "big hit" and the decision rate when the variable display result is not "big hit" are set so that the jackpot reliability according to each reach effect is obtained. Just do it. Depending on the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random value for determining the variation pattern, the presence / absence of reach effect, the presence / absence of reach effect of super reach, the effect mode in reach effect, etc. It should be possible to set.

The operation unit effect is executed at a predetermined ratio depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", regardless of the specific effect that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as the reach effect. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of. An operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of such a specific effect is also referred to as a single operation unit effect. On the other hand, there is a case where the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with the specific effect. The effect of light emission or vibration associated with such a specific effect is also referred to as a specific interlocking effect.

FIG. 17-2 (B) shows a setting example when the specific interlocking effect is executed. In this setting example, when a specific interlocking effect is executed along with a plurality of specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, music reproduction, big hit confirmation notification, big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. The emission color and vibration pattern are set. The emission color in the specific effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can emit light as a part of the specific effect. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking effect is set according to the content of the specific effect, and it is sufficient that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as a part of the specific effect. As described above, since the specific interlocking effect can be executed as a part of the specific effect, the jackpot reliability is the same as that of the specific effect, and the unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking effect is included in the special vibration effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect. The light emission of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach effect of SP reach A may be, for example, a jackpot reliability of about 40%. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be a lottery effect that can be executed when the number of rounds is the maximum (for example, 16 rounds) of the second jackpot type. It should be noted that the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery effect related to the jackpot type according to the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state and the end condition, and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are notified first in the jackpot game state. It may be a lottery effect regarding the presence or absence of rank up and the amount of increase, which is the number of rounds increased from the number of rounds. As the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, when it becomes possible to control the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that has won the V winning opening in the V winning attacker, the opening presence / absence and opening time of the V winning attacker It may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding a jackpot game state having different advantages depending on the number of times of opening, the end condition of the probability variation control, and the like. When it becomes possible to control from the small hit game state to the big hit game state based on the occurrence of the V prize due to the entry of the game ball into the V prize attacker, the opening presence / absence, opening time, opening number of times, or opening number of the V winning attacker, or It may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding a small hit game state or a big hit game state having different advantages depending on the number of rounds of the big hit game state controlled after the occurrence of the V prize.

Until the game state in which the V prize attacker can be released is started, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled, and then the game ball enters the V prize attacker from the start of the game state in which the V prize attacker can be released. In the period until the winning is generated, the vibration strong monitoring state may be controlled, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled so as not to vibrate. Then, when the V prize is generated, the vibration weak monitoring state may be controlled, and the effect including the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be executed. The vibration strong monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are easily detected, and the vibration weak monitoring state is a state in which vibration errors are more difficult to detect than the vibration strong monitoring state. During the period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration strength monitoring state is controlled. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibration, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the alarm image is displayed, the alarm sound is output, the alarm lamp is lit, the alarm signal is output, or a part or all of them are combined under the control of the effect control CPU 120. It suffices if the control for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality can be executed. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped by controlling the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor the vibration and suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the notification of the vibration error or the stop state of the game due to the inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 17-3 shows the setting contents of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. FIG. 17-3 (A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect. FIG. 17-3 (B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used for executing the special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the start of the pre-variation. In the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC02, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by AKC03, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC11, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

The vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation unit effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target fluctuation. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC12, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC13, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes rainbow color.

In the vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR1 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC21, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In the vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKR2 when the reach is established. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the reach is established. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC22, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes orange.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that when the reach is established and the effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is established, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common, so that the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented.

In the vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKS1 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC31, the emission color in the light emission effect in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit light with the vibration effect becomes white.

In the vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode is set to the on-period vibration according to the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC32, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes white.

As the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect at the time of reach development, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of reach development and the effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 may be able to be executed. Further, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 may be able to be executed. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-variation or the start of the target variation. .. As described above, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be common, so that the control load of the effect and the increase of the control data may be prevented.

The vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the vibration mode in which the on period continues until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected in the effective detection period. It should be. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. On the other hand, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from that at the time of the hit / miss notification. Operation unit effect pattern In the operation unit effect by the AKC41, the emission color in the light emission effect that causes the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to emit light in accordance with the vibration effect becomes gold.

When the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not the effective detection period is provided may be different depending on the type of effect executed with the variable display, for example, the type of reach effect. good. When an effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between golden light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. You may control it. If the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light continuously in gold for a period of vibration. On the other hand, when an effective detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B be switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) of red, which is different from gold, every 150 milliseconds. It may be controlled so as to have a light emitting mode for the purpose. By executing the light emission effect of the light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it is effective to operate the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A while executing the vibration effect. , Can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set may be used, and the priority of light emission control may be different. For example, in the first lamp layer, as a light emitting mode for suggesting normal operation, a light emitting mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is switched between red light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. Set the lamp control data. Lamp control data is set in the second lamp layer as a light emitting mode for suggesting a special operation so that the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Priority is given to execution. As a result, the light emitting mode for special operation suggestion may be controlled to be preferentially the light emitting mode for the light emitting effect rather than the light emitting mode for normal operation suggestion.

The plurality of reach effects that are super reach may include a strong SP reach having a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach having a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of the strong SP reach, the hit / miss notification effect is executed after the motion detection effect is executed by detecting the movement of the player who is the operation for the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a strong SP reach is executed, it is turned on until the movement of the player who operates the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be such that the period continues. In the reach effect of the weak SP reach, the hit / miss notification effect is executed without executing the motion detection effect. When the vibration effect corresponding to the reach effect of such a weak SP reach is executed, the vibration mode may be set to the vibration pattern AKV31 before 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit / miss notification effect. It should be noted that there may be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 5000 milliseconds, which is an effective detection period. It may be controlled to the vibration mode which becomes the period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled by switching between a period and an off period during which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the on period is such that the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may be controlled according to the vibration mode. There may be cases where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emit gold light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. It may be controlled so that the light emitting mode is switched between (lighting) and non-light emitting (off). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A continuously vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A for 2000 milliseconds. The operation lever and the push button 31B may be controlled so as to emit light in gold.

The vibration pattern AKV41 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 is an on-period vibration mode linked to the screen display in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV43 is an on-period vibration mode linked to music reproduction in the reach production of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV44 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes blue due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific light emission effect becomes gold due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A, the emission color in the specific emission effect changes from blue to gold with the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 is a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the big hit confirmation notification, and a special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect executed together with the big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2. There are cases where it becomes. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes white due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emission color in the specific emission effect becomes rainbow color due to the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

FIG. 17-4 shows an execution example of an effect by vibrating and emitting light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have normal emission luminance set to be low in the normal emission state, and the emission color is changed. It suffices to emit light so that it becomes white. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-light emission in the normal light emitting state.

The effect execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit white light is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any one of the operation unit effect pattern AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emission color becomes white. The operation unit effect pattern AKC01 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC11 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Both the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 has a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC32 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22. Even when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes white.

The effect execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit red light is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 and AKC12, the emission color becomes red. The operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC02 and AKC12 has a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes red is included.

The effect execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in rainbow colors is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by any of the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 and AKC13, the emission color becomes rainbow color. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the start of the target variation. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC03 and AKC13 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when the jackpot confirmation notification or the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes rainbow color.

The effect execution example AKA04 is a case where the light emission effect of causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in pink is executed. Operation unit effect pattern When the operation unit effect by the AKC21 is executed, the emission color becomes pink. The operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11.

The effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in orange is executed. When the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 is executed, the emission color becomes orange. The operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of reach development. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12.

The effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit blue light is executed. The emission color does not turn blue when the operation unit effect is executed. When the movable body operation of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes blue. Further, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes blue is included.

The effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect for causing the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light in gold is executed. When the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the emission color becomes gold. The operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be used when the operation unit effect is executed at the time of the hit / miss notification. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 includes the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. When the image display of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the emission color becomes gold. Further, even when the music reproduction of SP reach A is executed as a specific effect, the effect period in which the emission color becomes gold is included.

As described above, the emission colors of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit effect, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration effect. In addition to the emission color, any emission mode such as emission time, number of emission times (number of blinks), emission cycle (blinking cycle), and emission brightness can be determined by the execution timing of the operation unit effect, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration effect. Depending on the embodiment, they may be different or common.

The operation unit effect can be executed as a pre-reading advance notice effect or a continuous advance notice effect when it is executed at the start of the pre-variation. The pre-reading notice effect suggests whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit" before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous notice effect continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display to be suggested. The continuous advance notice effect can be executed by using the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number here may be any special figure reserved memory number at the time of starting winning. As the continuous effect pattern for each number of reserved memories, a plurality of continuous effect patterns are prepared in advance according to the effect mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of special figure hold storage at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 17-5 shows a setting example of a continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect. For the continuous effect pattern, for example, using a random value for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect pattern determination table according to the number of reserved storages is referred to, and a decision value matching the random value is assigned according to the judgment result at the time of winning. The decision may be made by determining the decision result.

FIG. 17-5 (A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “2”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD01, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD02, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD03, the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is executed when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD04, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD05, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect pattern AKD06, the operation unit effect is executed by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", and the operation by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 is executed when the remaining number of times is "0". The club production is executed.

FIG. 17-5 (B) shows continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “3”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". At this time, the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 17-5 (C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved storages is “4”. In the continuous advance notice effect by the continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation unit effect by any of the continuous effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is When it is "0", the operation unit effect by any one of the continuous effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 17-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 14 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 17-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition for executing the pre-reading notice effect, which is a continuous notice effect. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the effect control command (start opening winning designation command, hold storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. When there is a command reception, the notification content by the received command is specified, and for example, the winning determination result is specified as the notification content by the winning determination result command.

The winning judgment result is whether or not the variable display result is determined as a "big hit" and whether or not the variation pattern is determined as a specific variation pattern by using the game random numbers extracted at the start winning. , The result may be the result determined by the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process. As the winning determination result, for example, one of big hit, super reach confirmation at the time of loss, reach confirmation at the time of loss, and general at the time of loss may be shown. The jackpot winning determination result is a determination result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The winning judgment result of the super reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result. The winning judgment result of the reach confirmation at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range at the time of loss. Is. When the general winning judgment result at the time of loss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is not controlled, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range at the time of loss nor within the reach confirmation range. It is a judgment result corresponding to.

It suffices if the pre-reading notice condition can be satisfied when the judgment result at the time of winning is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In addition, if the winning judgment result this time is either a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss, and if the judgment results at the time of winning up to the previous time corresponding to the hold memory are all general at the time of losing, the pre-reading notice condition. May be possible. If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, which is the continuous advance notice effect, is already set to start, the pre-reading notice condition may be restricted so as not to be satisfied.

If the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for pre-reading advance notice execution determination and referring to a pre-reading advance notice execution decision table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, etc. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect may be determined as whether or not the reading notice is executed. In step AKS102, it is determined to be either "no execution" when the pre-reading notice effect is not executed or "execution" when the pre-reading notice effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the determination result at this time is determined to be "executed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. When it is determined to "execute" to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved storages may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous effect pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a continuous effect pattern and referring to a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to a winning determination result, the continuous effect pattern can be determined. Should be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105, the pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, the pre-reading advance notice flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as an effect control flag setting unit) may be set to the ON state.

In such a look-ahead notice setting process, when the winning judgment result is a big hit or the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss, the look-ahead notice condition in step AKS 101 can be satisfied, and the look-ahead notice is executed by step AKS 102. It becomes possible to determine the presence / absence and the continuous effect pattern by the step AKS105. Then, when the winning judgment result is a big hit, even if the winning judgment result is determined to be "executed" to execute the pre-reading notice effect by the step AKS 102 at a higher rate than the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. good. Further, in step AKS 105, when the winning determination result is a big hit, the continuous effect pattern may be determined at a rate different from the case where the winning determination result is the case where the super reach is confirmed at the time of loss. In this way, it suffices if it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect which is the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the winning determination result which is the pre-reading determination result.

FIG. 17-7 is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 14 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 17-7, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol or the like to be the final decorative symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The effect control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variable display contents such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. You just have to decide. The variation pattern specification command and the display result notification command are mainly used because the command transmission setting at the start of variation of the special symbol is set when the variation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. The variation pattern specification command is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern determined as a usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command that specifies a variable display result determined by using a random value for determining a special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". All you need is.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is displayed. It becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the confirmed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display is "miss". It becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols aligned with the same even-numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. Further, when the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", it suffices if it is possible to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols aligned with the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the combination of the definite decorative symbols to be the reach-off combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the combination of the definite decorative symbols to be the non-reach out-of-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When deciding the combination of the fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data which is a random value for determining the symbol and referring to the symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the variable display content, the combination is determined. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined.

After the final stop symbol and the like are determined, the operation unit effect is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. For example, when the pre-reading notice flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. When the pre-reading notice effect is being executed, the remaining number of times may be subtracted by 1, and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous effect pattern. As the continuous effect pattern, the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. When the remaining number of times after subtraction is "0", the pre-reading advance notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice effect is not being executed, the presence / absence of the operation unit effect corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit effect pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the effect of the operation unit is extracted, and the operation unit effect determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 is referred to depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the operation unit effect and the operation unit effect pattern used when executing the operation unit effect. The operation unit effect corresponding to this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. .. Therefore, the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time is limited so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit effect included in the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed. Is set.

In step AKS202, when the specific interlocking effect including the special vibration effect is executed along with the specific effect based on the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted. For example, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of the SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is provided so that all the operation unit effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while at the time of reach development or Execution of the operation unit effect may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit effect at the timing corresponding to the hit / fail notification. In this case, in the range of the variable display in which the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit limit is provided so that some operation unit effects cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display. .. In addition, in the range of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, a limit may be provided so that a part or all of the operation unit effect is difficult to be executed during the execution of the variable display. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 that determines the operation unit effect by the step AKS 202 can limit the execution of the operation unit effect including the vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed.

In the case where the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202, when a special effect different from the specific effect is executed based on a fluctuation pattern or a winning determination result, the special effect is different from the case where the special effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation unit effect may be set so that a part or all of the operation unit effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation unit effect, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step AKS203). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (variable display effect control patterns) corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets the pattern to be used. .. Further, the effect control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of effect control patterns (operation unit effect control patterns) prepared in response to the operation unit effect determined by step AKS202 and set them as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit or the like) is set (step AKS204). Then, the variation of the decorative pattern or the like is started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (variable display effect control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image is displayed. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the variable start, the setting for updating the hold display or the like is made in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the hold display or the like, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 17-8 shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 17-8 (A) and an operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 17-8 (B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 17-8 (A) corresponds to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and various effects are executed from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Contains control data used to control. The operation unit effect control pattern shown in FIG. 17-8 (B) includes control data used for controlling the execution of the operation unit effect.

The variable display effect control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, and the like. .. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (judgment value) to be compared with the effect control process timer value, which is a stored value of the effect control process timer, and is a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation. Is preset. In addition, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command was received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process was executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control and the like may be set corresponding to the predetermined control content and processing content.

The display control data includes data showing the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data showing the variation mode of each decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data showing a voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data showing an output mode such as a sound effect linked to a variable display of a decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data that specifies the voice output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating a light emission driving mode during variable display of the decorative pattern for a light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 or a decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emitting mode of the light emitting body during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's operation, such as a tilting operation for the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation for the trigger button, or a pressing operation for the push button 31B, and each operation. Includes data that indicates the mode of the effect operation according to the player's motion detection, such as data that specifies the control content of the effect motion when the player effectively detects. The vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the on period and the driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

It should be noted that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, and the effect control pattern is configured to include a part of the control data according to the content of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plurality of types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different depending on the content of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, some process data includes all of display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and some process data includes some of these. It's okay. Further, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display during effect processing in step S172 of the effect control process process, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values is matched, and if they match, it is determined. Controls the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect device (image display device 5, speaker 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) according to the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data # n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. 9. Control of a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data # n, display control data # 1 to display control data # n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to # n. The data # n, the lamp control data # 1 to the lamp control data # n, the operation detection control data # 1 to the operation detection control data # n, and the vibration control data # 1 to the vibration control data # n are the control of the effect operation in the effect device. The effect control execution data # 1 to the effect control execution data # n, which indicate the contents and specify the execution of the effect control, are configured.

The operation unit effect control pattern is composed of, for example, process data including an effect control process timer determination value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitting body in the operation unit effect, such as lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies a light emission mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect. The vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern includes data indicating the on period and the drive mode of the vibration generator in the operation unit effect, such as driving the vibration motor 131. That is, the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect.

FIG. 17-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation unit effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. The timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings at which the operation unit effect at the start of the pre-variation can be executed corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol that becomes the pre-variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the read-ahead notice setting process, the operation unit effect is executed at a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation according to the number of remaining times. be able to. For example, when the number of remaining times is "3", the operation unit effect can be executed in the timing AKT01, and when the number of remaining times is "2", the operation unit effect can be executed in the timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times. When is "1", the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT03.

The timing AKT11 shown in FIGS. 17-9 is a timing at which the operation unit effect at the start of the target variation can be executed in response to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol to be the target variation is started. For example, when the continuous effect pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading notice setting process, the operation unit based on the operation unit effect pattern according to the remaining number of times in a part or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. At the timing AKT 11 at which the target variation starts after the effect is executed, the operation unit effect according to the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times of "0" can be executed. Further, at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation, the operation unit effect may be executed. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 to AKC13 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change. be able to.

As in the case of Timing AKT01 to AKT03 or Timing AKT11, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be such that the operation unit effect can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. , It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. As described above, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is started may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

In the timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIGS. 17-9, as the operation unit effect corresponding to the variable display this time, the operation unit effect when the reach is established, the operation unit effect when the reach is developed, and the operation unit effect when the hit / fail notification is agitated. Each is a feasible timing. For example, depending on the operation unit effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation unit effect can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and the operation unit effect at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation unit effect at the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. Specifically, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established. Can be done. Further, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is determined by step AKS202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development. Alternatively, when the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 is determined by step ASK202, the operation unit effect according to the determined operation unit effect pattern can be executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / miss notification.

FIG. 17-10 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 17-10 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 17-10 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 17-10 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 17-10 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 300 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above steps, the emission brightness of white may be changed periodically.

FIG. 17-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red as shown in FIG. 17-11 (A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 17-11 (B). It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 17-11 (A) becomes iridescent, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 17-11 (B). , It can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 17-11 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 17-11 (A), in the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are continuously red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, a plurality of LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light by shifting the emission colors of red, magenta, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange according to the elapsed time and the emission position. , Lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow color. The light emitting positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified as a plurality of sections such as the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emitting time, the light emitting color, and the light emitting light can be specified according to each section. It suffices if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 17-12 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 17-12 (A) becomes white and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 17-12 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 17-12 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 1500 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 17-12 (A), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. The emission effect that the emission color becomes white according to the on period of the vibration effect is the first brightness in which the white emission brightness is high and the second brightness in which the emission brightness is low, for example, every 30 milliseconds in the on period of 1500 milliseconds. By alternately repeating the above steps, the emission brightness of white may be changed periodically.

FIG. 17-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color is red as shown in FIG. 17-13 (A) and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 17-13 (B). It can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in FIG. 17-13 (A) becomes iridescent, and a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 17-13 (B). , It can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 17-13 (B), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period of 3000 milliseconds continues. As shown in FIG. 17-13 (A), in the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 according to the on period of the vibration effect. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit red light by alternately repeating the first brightness with high emission brightness and the second brightness with low emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission mode included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 changes the emission brightness in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. Will be. As described above, as an effect mode of the light emission effect, not only the light emission color but also the light emission cycle may be different to suggest the jackpot reliability. In the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission, for example, every 20 milliseconds. As an effect mode of the light emission effect, while the light emission cycle is common, it may be possible to suggest the jackpot reliability by making the light emission colors different. In this way, for example, when the emission colors in the emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the emission effect by sharing the emission cycle.

FIG. 17-14 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC21 can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the effect AKR1 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 17-14 (A). Includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in (B) becomes pink, and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 17-14 (C) is used. The effect AKR1 that is an effect when the reach is established may be, for example, an effect that displays an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect that displays a background image according to the establishment of the reach. It may be any other effect as long as it is an arbitrary production accompanying the establishment of reach. As shown in FIG. 17-14 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 17-14 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in pink in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light.

FIG. 17-15 shows a control example of the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC22 can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, corresponding to the effect AKR2 which is the effect when the reach is established as shown in FIGS. 17-15 (A). It includes a light emission effect in which the emission color shown in (B) turns orange and a vibration effect in which the vibration pattern AKV12 shown in FIG. 17-15 (C) is used. The effect AKR2, which is an effect when the reach is established, may be an effect of displaying an effect image showing the reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or an effect of displaying a background image according to the establishment of the reach. It may be any other effect as long as it is an arbitrary production accompanying the establishment of reach. It suffices if the effect mode is different between the effect AKR1 and the effect AKR2, which are the effects when the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 17-15 (C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating twice alternately, the vibration mode includes an on period of the second vibration on time (for example, 250 ms) and an on period of the third vibration on time (for example, 500 ms). As shown in FIG. 17-15 (B), the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. Further, when the on periods of the vibration effects are different vibration on times, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit orange light. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit orange light. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by alternately repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed corresponding to the effects AKS1 and AKS2 that are the effect at the time of reach development at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the emission color becomes white. , The vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, and the like. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV21 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS1 in the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC31. In the case of the operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV22 is an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKS2. In any of the operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect.

The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the hit / fail effect at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / miss notification, and the light emission effect that the emission color becomes gold and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emitting effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in gold according to the on period of the vibration effect.

As shown in FIGS. 17-12 and 17-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In this case, a vibration effect is executed by a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that an operation member such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B is used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. That is, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common may be provided regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm out. As for the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 and AKC32, is executed. Includes things. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development become white with a common emission color, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, whereas the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that an operation member such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B is used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change includes the operation unit effect that the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target change and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 13 at the time of reach development, and the vibration effect is produced. The vibration mode of the above may be different. As in the case where the emission color becomes white, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation includes the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development and the light emission mode of the light emission effect. Includes what is common. Further, as in the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development, and the light emission. It may include those having different light emitting modes of the effect. The operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development does not have to include the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation and the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification includes an operation unit effect such as an operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold due to the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV31. I'm out. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is 100% common between the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered, and the vibration effect is produced. There are cases where the vibration modes of the above are different. Further, the emission color is different and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different between the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT14 when the hit / miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the jackpot reliability is common, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, or the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, so that the stick controller 31A It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using the operation members such as the push button 31B and the push button 31B to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at which the target fluctuation starts is that the emission color becomes white, red, or rainbow color due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. Includes those that perform light emission effects. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 11 at the start of the target fluctuation and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT 12 at the time when the reach is established, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed. There are cases where the embodiments are different. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12, such as the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22. Includes what to do. The operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is such that the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC31 and AKC32 is executed. Includes things. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect differs between the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT 12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed in the timing AKT 13 when the reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. Is different. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be achieved. It can be appropriately diversified to improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development may include one that executes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be performed. It can be appropriately diversified to improve the entertainment of the game.

The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed in the timing AKT12 when the reach is established is 100% regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed in the timing AKT13 at the time of reach development is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability is 100% when the operation unit effect is executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / fail notification. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit effect is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. The vibration modes of the vibration effect are the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity driven by the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of the strong vibration and the weak vibration in the vibration intensity, and others. , Arbitrary vibration patterns that vibrate the operating members such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be different.

The plurality of specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the movable body movement, the image display, the music reproduction, the big hit confirmation notification, and the big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the reach effect of SP reach A. In the reach effect of SP reach A, for example, the jackpot reliability is about 40%. Therefore, when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. Become. Since the movable body movement, the image display, and the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A are all executed as a part of the reach effect, they do not have the jackpot reliability individually. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect of deterministically notifying that the variable display result is a "big hit". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery effects of the jackpot type according to the number of rounds and the like, corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. The jackpot confirmation notification and the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to the reach production of SP reach A in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result is "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It is different from the production with a big hit reliability. In this way, among a plurality of specific effects, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed for the specific effect having the jackpot reliability. It suffices if it is set as. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect by the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIG. 17-16 shows an execution example of an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of production execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the execution mode of the effect by light emission.

In the effect execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit white light according to the background display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light according to the background display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow colors by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes rainbow color due to the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed in the background. While the light is emitted so as to change from black to white according to the above, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

In the effect execution example AKF04, when the character display of the image display device 5 is a blue display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit blue light according to the character display. , The operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. For example, the operation unit effect by any one of the operation unit effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white with the vibration effect.

For example, the background display, the character display, and other predetermined effects by displaying an arbitrary effect image of the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, variable display and the like are performed using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5 and lamp control data for controlling light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. There is. When the operation unit effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light due to the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. It is possible to emit light in the light emitting mode of. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, the operation unit effect is performed using the control data read from the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. The control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In contrast to the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation unit effect due to the predetermined effect. Is. In this way, the light emitting mode is different between the operating member such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N to emit light. It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by appropriately diversifying the production by.

The predetermined effect may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to the screen display of the image display device 5 or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit light in a emission color corresponding to the audio output of, for example, BGM, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light emission color of the light emission effect in the club effect may be emitted. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice message that gives the player the impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the voice output. On the other hand, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be made to emit white light by the light emission effect in the operation unit effect. Even in this way, by making the light emitting mode different between the operating members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N. , It is possible to improve the entertainment of the game by appropriately diversifying the production by light emission. In the predetermined effect, the screen display of the image display device 5 is dimmed, and in addition to stopping the audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. are not emitted (turned off). May be. When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation member such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is further increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

FIG. 17-17 shows an example of setting an effect period in which a specific interlocking effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes blue due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed along with the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be performed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed along with the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ03 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to gold due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43. ..

The period AKZ04 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the big hit confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ04 includes a specific light emission effect in which the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol, to display the production image of the scene where the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character in the reach production, the speaker 8L, The jackpot confirmation sound is output by 8R, the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is turned on, or a part or all of these can be combined to allow the player to recognize the jackpot. It suffices if the notification of is executed.

In addition, following the operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 at the time of the hit / miss notification, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ04 accompanying the big hit confirmation notification may be executed. In this case, the impression of the effect can be enhanced and the interest of the game can be improved by executing the specific interlocking effect accompanying the big hit confirmation notification while increasing the expectation of the player by the effect of the operation unit. When executing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation unit effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the special vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emission effect or the specific light emission effect may be performed. The light emission mode may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The emission brightness may be different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By making the vibration mode and the light emission mode different to give the effect a sharpness, it is possible to easily recognize the distinction between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, appropriately diversify the effect, and improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in accordance with the big hit type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes directing. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed in the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emission color of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow color due to the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light emission effect.

17-18 to 17-20 show a case where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIGS. 17-18 show the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIGS. 17-19 show the effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A is executed. FIGS. 17-20 show production execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the reach production of SP reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach effect of the SP reach A is started due to the reach development, the movable body operation is performed by changing the position of the movable body 32 from the initial position as in the effect execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linearly or parallelly moving upward from the initial position, and the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32 is "SP. An effect image showing a message such as "reach A" is displayed. After that, by continuing to change the position of the movable body 32, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the effect execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window portion of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is ..." is displayed.

Production execution example Along with the position change of the movable body 32 that is a movable body operation such as AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light with vibration. The specific interlocking effect performed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A is a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes blue in the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 17-17. , Includes. Further, when the position of the movable body 32 is continuously changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the upper end front on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the effect execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time from the lower end front to the upper end front of the display screen where the position of the movable body 32 is the initial position is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated over this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode during which the lever or the push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, when the period is AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between an on period in which the operation lever and the push button 31B are vibrated every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which the stick controller 31B is not vibrated. Further, the specific light emitting effect may be executed in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B continuously emits light in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) every 250 milliseconds. May be good.

Production execution example When the movable body operation in the reach production of SP reach A such as AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the positions of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed, for example. As a result, the light may be emitted in a light emission pattern in which the light emission color and the light emission brightness gradually change from the lower side to the upper side. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emission color of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N becomes blue, and the emission brightness changes in a wavy shape according to the height and time. It suffices to emit light as if it were.

After the movement of the movable body is completed as in the effect execution example AKG03, the effect image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as the effect execution example AKG11 as the image display in the reach effect of the SP reach A. At this time, for example, the character display indicating the message "super hot" is performed in the gold display color. Further, as in the effect execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Production execution example Along with the display of the production image to be the image display such as AKG11 and AKG12, the specific interlocking effect is executed, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light together with the vibration. The specific interlocking effect executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A includes a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold in the period AKZ02 shown in FIGS. 17-17. Includes. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of the effect image in the reach effect different from the character display is started as in the effect execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking effect in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "super hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the vibration that is the on period for continuously vibrating the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A over this period AKZ02. A special vibration effect may be performed depending on the embodiment. Further, during the period AKZ02, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are alternately repeated with the first brightness having a high golden emission brightness and the second brightness having a low emission brightness every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

Example of effect execution When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A such as AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are, for example, on the display screen of the image display device 5. The emission color may be gold according to the image display and the emission color of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. For example, with the display of the effect image such as the effect execution example AKG11 and AKG12, the emission color of the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N becomes gold, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image is started, the light may be emitted in a light emitting color different from the gold color.

After the display of the effect image such as the effect execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect execution example AKG21 as the music reproduction in the reach effect of the SP reach A. Subsequently, as in the production execution example AKG22, the sound of the music phrase PH02 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. After that, the sound of the music phrase PH03 is output by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the production execution example AKG23. In this way, by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 according to the progress of the production, it is sufficient that the entire music reproduction in the reach production of the SP reach A can be executed.

Production Execution Example A specific interlocking effect is executed along with the output of audio for playing music such as AKG21 to AKG23, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light together with vibration. In the specific interlocking effect performed together with the music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A, the special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV43 and the emission color change from blue to red in the period AKZ03 shown in FIGS. 17-17, and further. It includes a specific light emission effect that changes from red to gold. Production execution example In AKG21, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color is red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. Production execution example In the AKG23, a specific light emission effect in which the emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. As described above, it is sufficient to be able to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emission color changes to a plurality of colors as the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output according to the progress of the effect.

FIG. 17-21 shows a case where the musical scale changes in order as the production progresses as the music reproduction execution example AKH01. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 17-21 (A), in the period AKZ03 in which the specific interlocking effect can be executed along with the music reproduction, each of do, re, mi, fa, so, la, shi, and do The sound corresponding to the scale is output by the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of the last output do may be one octave higher than the scale of the first output do.

The specific interlocking effect associated with such music reproduction is a light emission effect that is a specific light emission effect in which the emission color changes as shown in FIG. 17-21 (B), and a special emission effect based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 17-21 (C). It can be executed in AKZ03 for a period corresponding to music reproduction, including a vibration effect which is a vibration effect. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 17-21 (C) is a vibration mode in which the on period and the off period are alternately repeated a plurality of times according to the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 17-21 (B), the specific light emission effect associated with this special vibration effect is the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the audio output period corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration effect. The emission color of is changed in order between blue, red, and gold. During the period when the sound output is stopped and the period when the special vibration effect is off, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be turned off without emitting light. In the sound output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be different for each scale. For example, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously emitted in blue for a period of time which is the scale of the first output. Next, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the first brightness having a high light emission brightness and the second brightness having a low light emission brightness are alternately repeated during the period of the scale. After that, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between light emission (lighting) and non-light emission (off) in gold during the period of the scale of Mi. In this way, by setting the light emission mode in which the light emission amount is different for each light emission color according to each scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the game entertainment.

The reach effect of the SP reach A is executably controlled by using the control data read from the variable display effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 17-8 (A) is based on lamp control data and vibration control data, and is associated with specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music reproduction in the reach effect of SP reach A. The specific interlocking effect is set to be executable. In the specific interlocking effect, a special vibration effect using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 can be executed. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration effect by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration effect by the vibration pattern in the operation unit effect. In this way, the stick controller 31A and the stick controller 31A have different vibration modes between the vibration effect in the operation unit effect that can be executed regardless of the specific effect and the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the operation member such as the push button 31B and improve the game entertainment.

When executing the operation unit effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are used to emit light of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in accordance with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When executing the specific interlocking effect, the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are moved by using the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the special vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emission effect for emitting light is executed. A player who has been paying attention to an image display on a display screen of an image display device 5, for example, by performing an effect including vibration and light emission of an operation member such as an operation lever of the stick controller 31A and a push button 31B, can see the image display. By recognizing the vibration and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the production is enhanced.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 17-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed along with the operation of the movable body 32 which is the movable object operation in the reach effect of the SP reach A. As described above, since the special vibration effect can be executed during the operation period of the movable body 32, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 17-17, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed along with the big hit confirmation notification. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to the notification that the jackpot game state is controlled, the effect using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. be able to.

The specific interlocking effect includes a specific light emitting effect due to the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light in association with the special vibration effect by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission mode such as the emission color is different between the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect in the operation unit effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect in the specific interlocking effect. In this way, by making the light emitting mode different according to the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the game entertainment. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 17-10 and 17-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. When the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in FIGS. 17-12 and 17-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. The vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. The vibration mode is different as well as different. In addition, the emission colors are white and red in the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT01 at the start of the pre-variation and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target variation. By becoming one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, while the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common, so that the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be operated. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production using the members and improve the entertainment of the game.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is executed by the operation unit effect at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change based on the winning determination result that is the pre-reading determination result. It is executed in the variable display before the variable display to be performed. In this way, by making the timing at which the operation unit effect is executed different, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effect using the operation member such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the game entertainment.

As shown in FIGS. 17-10 and 17-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. When the emission color becomes white, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emission color becomes red or rainbow color. In that case, the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emission color is white or the emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that an operation member such as a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B is used. It is possible to appropriately diversify the production and improve the entertainment of the game. It should be noted that the vibration effect by the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emission color becomes red and the case where the emission color becomes rainbow color. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common depending on whether the emission color is red or the emission color is rainbow. As described above, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect is an operation unit effect pattern in which the emission color in the light emission effect is different depending on the case where the remaining number of times is other than "0" and the case where the remaining number of times is "0". Some include. For example, the continuous effect pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 17-5 (A) includes an operation unit effect pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and an operation unit effect pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , Includes. The operation unit effect by the operation unit effect pattern AKC01 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes white. Operation unit effect pattern The operation unit effect by the AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change. The light emission mode is different between the two. In this way, by providing a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the effect using the operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the continuous effect pattern used to execute the continuous advance notice effect, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit effect pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. Is set to prevent it from becoming degraded. For example, in the continuous effect pattern shown in FIG. 17-5 (A), if the operation unit effect pattern AKC02 is the case where the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern is the case where the remaining number of times is "0". As a result, it is set to prevent the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. If the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 is used when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit effect pattern AKC11 or the operation unit effect pattern AKC12 is used as the operation unit effect pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation unit effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, even though the operation unit effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the pre-variation. , It is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game without lowering the expectation of the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 17-10 and 17-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is the emission color. Including the case where the emission color becomes white and the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, and when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period and the off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. And non-light emission are repeated, and when the emission color turns red, light is continuously emitted according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIGS. 17-12 and 17-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target change, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. Including the case where the emission color becomes red or rainbow color different from white, when the emission color becomes white, it emits light according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02, and the emission color becomes red. In that case, light is emitted intermittently according to the on period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV03. In the vibration effect by the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the setting of the on period is different from each other, so that the light emission mode such as the light emission period in the light emission effect is different. Even in this way, it suffices if it is possible to provide a case where the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different.

(Variation example of characteristic part 48AK-50AK)
Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be different. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value of. In addition, regarding the operation unit effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different depending on any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the timing to be executed, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be different according to any advantage regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on such advantages.

When the timing for executing the operation unit effect is different and common, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different and common, and when the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different and common, the jackpot reliability is The combination of each case, such as a different case and a common case, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different and common between the operation unit effect and the specific interlocking effect, and when the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the special vibration effect is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. The combination of each case can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. In addition, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the light emission effect can be reduced by sharing the light emission mode of the light emission effect. When the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration mode of the vibration effect. When some vibration modes in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration effect by sharing the other vibration modes in the vibration effect. For example, when the vibration intensities in the vibration effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control load of the vibration effect by sharing the vibration cycle in the vibration effect. When some of the light emitting modes in the light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emitting effect by sharing the other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect. For example, when the emission colors in the light emission effect are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission effect by sharing the light emission cycle in the light emission effect. It suffices if the control burden can be reduced by the same common use of the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed when the game state is controlled to an arbitrary game state such as a small hit game state or a big hit game state. It may be possible. For example, in the case of being controlled to a small hit game state, a predetermined ratio is determined according to whether or not the V winning attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times of opening, or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect with. When controlled to the jackpot game state, the number of rounds will be increased from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, such as the presence / absence of time reduction control and probability variation control after the end of the jackpot game state, the end condition, and the rank up. It may be possible to execute the operation unit effect at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence / absence, the amount of increase, and the like. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking effect along with a specific effect such as a movable object motion, an image display, and a music reproduction in a small hit game state or a big hit game state.

The specific effect that can execute the specific interlocking effect may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed according to the execution of the variable display, or may be an arbitrary effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike the reach effect, when a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit" at a predetermined ratio and is controlled to the big hit gaming state is executed, it is specified in a part or all of the effect period. It may be possible to execute the interlocking effect.

When controlled to an arbitrary effect state, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect may be executed. For example, when the effect is controlled to be the special effect mode, the operation unit effect or the specific interlocking effect is executed at a higher rate than when the effect state is controlled to be different from the special effect mode. It may be possible.

The operation member capable of performing the effect by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to be able to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a touch operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Further, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined operation by a player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor, may be used. The result of shooting the player's hand or the like using a predetermined camera may be analyzed (video type motion capture) so that the movement by the player can be detected. In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined operation by the player may be used. A contact member that allows the player to come into contact with a hand or the like may be provided together with such a motion detection member, and the contact member may be vibrated or emitted light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. ..

The vibration effect included in the operation unit effect can correspond to the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation can correspond to the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effect, the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation can correspond to the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. The light emitting effect included in the operation unit effect is associated with the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect in the feature unit 48AK, the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the light emission effect. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed in the timings AKT01 to AKT03 at the start of the pre-variation is the light emission associated with the first vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. It can correspond to the production. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effect, the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timing AKT11 at the start of the target fluctuation is the light-emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect in the feature unit 50AK. Can be accommodated. The special vibration effect included in the specific interlocking effect can correspond to the special vibration effect in the feature unit 49AK.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned feature portions and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always made to shift via the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 is performed. ) May be migrated.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be used as a part of the out-of-time symbol or as a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, a lottery may be executed using a dedicated random number for time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or a lottery random number of a missed symbol or a big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed by using other random numbers such as a lottery random number, a small hit symbol lottery random number, a big hit lottery determination random number, and a fall lottery lottery random number.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a missed symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, the presence or absence of the transition to the time saving state will not be drawn by lottery, and the number of time saving will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

Regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the start opening (first start winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time-saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time saving area may be the winning of the time saving symbol.

In addition, when the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure and the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, the winning value is the specific missing symbol random number when the missing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery, and the jackpot symbol random number is specified when the big hit symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. The big hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, the performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the set value cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the big hit determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time-saving is already in the state, even if the number of times of time-saving is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time reductions given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time-saving end symbol derivation lottery (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving limiters is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is an operating means that can be operated by the player, a vibration effect executing means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and an operating means that accompanies the vibration effect. It is equipped with a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration of the vibration effect is performed according to the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect. The mode is different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be higher, for example, as long as the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The fact that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed is, for example, a big hit according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the application of the operation unit effect pattern. It may be reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, the emission color and the vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed has a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed, and vibration. The embodiments may be different. Here, the common ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The vibration effect can be executed, and the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the line-of-sight at the first timing. It may be possible to execute the line-of-sight guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing without executing the guidance effect. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3, T4, or the like. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 may be used in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the operating means and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 49AK)
It is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player, and a vibration effect that can execute a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as an operation means that the player can operate and a vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. A predetermined vibration effect is provided with an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect according to the progress of the game. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different depending on the above, and the vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect according to the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. .. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration pattern included in the operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. Just do it. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission state color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The specific effect may be, for example, a reach effect of SP reach A, a big hit confirmation notification, a big hit type lottery, or the like. The specific effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect process during variable display in step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio of controlling to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, for example, depending on the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The jackpot reliability may be sufficient. The ability to execute the special vibration effect may be, for example, the execution of the vibration effect during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The difference in vibration mode between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, and the like.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission mode is executed or the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow color. The different vibration modes may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed is controlled to an advantageous state when it is executed is the same. , The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. .. Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., which are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The predetermined vibration effect can be executed, and the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the first timing. In, the line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3, T4, or the like. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 may be used in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the operating means and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

When the predetermined vibration effect is executed, the rate of being controlled in an advantageous state may be higher than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation of 50% or more, which is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the game interest.

The specific effect executing means can execute an effect of operating the movable member as a specific effect, and the vibration effect executing means may be able to execute a special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of operating the movable member may be, for example, an effect execution example AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect with the notification that the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is performed in an advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit confirmation notification. The special vibration effect associated with this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting effect executing means can execute a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emitting mode differs between the light emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect associated with the special vibration effect. May be good. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color changes from blue, gold, or blue to gold via red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

When the special vibration effect is executed, a limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined vibration effect may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined by step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Problem-solving means and effects of feature section 50AK)
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can execute the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect as the operation means that the player can operate and the vibration effect that the operation means vibrates. It is equipped with a vibration effect executing means and a light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the vibration effect is executed when the vibration effect is executed rather than when the vibration effect is not executed. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is high, and the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the timing to be executed in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. However, the vibration mode is different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a big hit gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration effect may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting effect executing means may be, for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the effect processing during variable display in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS 203. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed may be higher, for example, as long as the jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern or the like. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect, for example, it may be the jackpot reliability according to the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The timing of execution differs between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, the timing of the start of the pre-variation, AKT01 to AKT03, which is different from the timing of the start of the target variation, AKT11. The difference in vibration mode between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect, for example, when the emission colors included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 are white, red, or rainbow color. And so on.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by paying attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The vibration effect executing means may be able to execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the notification effect for notifying whether or not the vibration effect is controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed and improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode or the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emitting mode may be, for example, when the light emitting color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. It is common and may have different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have a common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. The vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio controlled to the advantageous state may be, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

Even if the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display is started and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the difference in the emission mode may be, for example, a case where the emission color is white, red, or rainbow color, which is different from the case where the emission color is pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, the case of vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect according to the timing to improve the game entertainment.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. May be good. Here, the difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect according to the timing and improve the game entertainment.

A first light emitting means for causing the operation means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game are provided, and the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means is different from the light emitting mode in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible to emit light with. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1 or a button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, or the like. The predetermined effect may be, for example, display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect executing means may be, for example, an image display device 5. The light emitting mode according to the vibration effect may be, for example, the emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light emitting mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emitting mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode by the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to improve the game entertainment.

The line-of-sight guidance effect executing means capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means is provided, and the vibration effect executing means is provided at the first timing and the second timing after the first timing. , The second vibration effect can be executed, the second vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect execution means is the first. The line-of-sight guidance effect may not be executed at the first timing, and the line-of-sight guidance effect may be executed before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, or the like. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1 and T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3, T4, or the like. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, for example, the timings T1 and T2 may be used in step 10SHS3. When the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, for example, the timings T3 and T4 may be used in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately recognize the vibration of the operating means and sufficiently enhance the interest of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect executing means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in the variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the pre-reading determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the hold storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior variation.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a first vibration light emitting mode and a second vibration light emitting mode different from the first vibration light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first vibration light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different depending on whether the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emitting mode at the time of the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is white. The light emitting mode at the time of the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emitting color is red or rainbow color. The difference in vibration mode may be, for example, in the case of a vibration pattern AKV01 different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect to improve the game entertainment.

The light emitting mode may be different between the light emitting effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emitting effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the difference in the light emission mode is, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous effect pattern and the emission color of the operation unit effect pattern is different from the case where the remaining number of times is "0". All you need is.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation relating to the association of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration of the feature portions 48AK to 50AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration of the other feature portions. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
As the suggestion effect suggesting that the state is controlled to the advantageous state, the special suggestion effect and the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect, and the third suggestion effect, which have a lower expectation of being controlled by the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect. , A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including the fourth suggestion effect,
It is notified that the special development effect can be executed as the first development pattern before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is notified, and that the effect result of the second suggestion effect is not controlled to the advantageous state. After that, a development effect execution means that can execute a special development effect different from the special development effect as a second development pattern,
Equipped with
The suggestion effect execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect executing means, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect after the execution of the special development effect.
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed.
The production period of the special development production is longer than the production period of the special development production.
The special development effect includes a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect that is executed after the first effect and in which the previous stage information is visibly displayed, and the second effect. Including the third effect, which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which the latter stage information having a higher degree of emphasis than the first stage information is visually displayed.
Rather than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the special development effect is controlled to the advantageous state, the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the control to the advantageous state is performed. The period is shorter,
Moreover,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
As the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, a vibration effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect, and a vibration effect executing means.
A light emitting effect executing means capable of executing a light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect, and a light emitting effect executing means.
It is equipped with a specific effect execution means that can execute a specific effect according to the progress of the game.
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed.
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed.
The vibration effect executing means can execute the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect.
The vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images